HomeMy WebLinkAboutPLANS & SPECS - 22-00015 - BYUI Hinkley Building - Fan Coil Replacement Electrical
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
AT
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO
REXBURG, IDAHO
OWNER PROJECT NO: 12017
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared by
HEATH ENGINEERING COMPANY
377 West 800 North
Salt Lake City, Utah 84103
August 20, 2021
100% REVIEW DOCUMENTS
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
CONSULTANTS
HEATH ENGINEERING COMPANY
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
377 West 800 North
Salt Lake City, UT 84103
PAYNE ENGINEERING
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
1823 E. Center
Pocatello, ID 83201
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL
REPLACEMENT PROJECT
AT
BYU - IDAHO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTHORITY
List of Consultants
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
Invitation To Bid
Notice to Bidders
Instructions to Bidders
Form of Proposal
Mechanical Bid Breakdown Form
General Conditions Table of Contents
General Conditions
Agreement Between Owner and Contactor
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Division 21 – Fire Sprinkler
Section 211313 - Fire Sprinkler System
Division 22 – Plumbing
Section 221300 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Systems Equipment
Section 221426 - Floor Drains
Division 23 – Mechanical
Section 230000 - General Mechanical Requirements
Section 230100 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Section 230505 - Firestopping
Section 230513 - Motors, Drivers and Electrical Requirements
Section 230519 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges
Section 230523 - Valves
Section 230529 - Mechanical Supporting Devices
Section 230548 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control
Section 230553 - Mechanical Identification
Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, Balancing
Section 230700 - Mechanical Insulation
Section 230900 - Mechanical Control Systems
Section 230923 - Direct Digital Control Systems
Section 230933 - Electric Control System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 232000 - General Pipes and Fittings
Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping and Specitalies
Section 232500 - Chemical Water Treatment
Section 233100 - Ductwork
Section 233300 - Ductwork Accessories
Section 233423 - Power Ventilators
Section 233616 - Air Terminal Units
Section 234116 - Air Filters
Section 237300 - Packaged Air Handling Equipment
Section 238200 - Terminal Heat Transfer Units
Section 238216 - Heating and Cooling Units
Division 26 – Electrical
Section 260501 - Common Electrical Requirements
Section 260502 - Electrical Demolition Requirements
Section 260519 - Line-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Section 260553 - Electrical Identification
Section 262816 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Section 262913 - Enclosed Controllers
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 1
SECTION 21 1313
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and General Requirements, apply to work of this section.
B. Requirements of Mechanical General Provisions Sections govern the work specified in
this section, except the standards of NFPA #13 shall take precedence.
C. Technical sections that describe related work, including but not limited to divisions 22, 23
and 26, apply to this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Furnish all materials, equipment and supplies and perform all work and operations to
design, construct and make functional remodel the existing fire sprinkler system in the
Manwaring Center of Brigham Young University Idaho. The design of the fire sprinkler
system remodel shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13, BYU Idaho Fire Sprinkler
Criteria, Rexburg City Fire Department, FM Global Insurance, Owner, Architect, Engineer
and be in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Materials, devices and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory
Mutual approved for use in fire protection systems.Designer: The designer for the fire
sprinkler system shall be a staff employee of the "Installer" and shall be a Certified
Engineering Technician in Fire Protection (NICET Level III minimum). The Certification
shall be active during the entire contract period. The designer shall certify that the
drawings and installation are in accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications.
The designer shall make a complete and final inspection of the installation, including
operating all alarms, control valves checking all piping, seismic bracing, hangers, etc.
After checking all components of the system, he shall provide a letter stating that the
installation is complete, operational and in accordance with approved plans and
specifications. If acceptable changes have been made in the installation since the plans
were approved, the designer shall correct the shop drawings and provide as-built
drawings to the Owner with the letter.
B. Installer: The contractor for the fire protection system shall be duly licensed by the state
in which the project is being constructed. The contractor must be engaged in the
installation of the types of automatic fire protection systems required for this project and
be fully familiar with all local conditions, specified codes and requirements. Installer shall
employ a Certified Engineering Technician in Fire Protection (NICET Level III minimum).
The Certification shall be active during the entire contract period. The technician shall
certify that the drawings and installation are in accordance with the intent of the plans and
specifications. The technician shall make a complete and final inspection of the
installation, including operating all alarms, control valves checking all piping, seismic
bracing, hangers, etc. After checking all components of the system, he shall provide a
letter stating that the installation is complete, operational and in accordance with
approved plans and specifications. If acceptable changes have been made in the
installation since the plans were approved, the technician shall correct the shop drawings
and provide as-built drawings to the Owner with the letter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 2
A. Descriptive Data: Descriptive data shall be submitted on the following items of material
and/or equipment. Such data shall consist of manufacturer's or supplier's catalog
information in sufficient detail to allow verification that the material and/or equipment
meets the specification requirements or is equal to that specified.
1. All control valves, backflow preventers, check valves, pipe, fittings, couplings,
pipe supports, pipe braces, sprinklers and escutcheons, FDC, valve tamper and
water flow alarm devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare complete shop drawings for sprinkler system remodel. Shop
drawings shall be coordinated with existing equipment, building structure and with all
other existing building features or elements. Show existing piping and clearly denote
piping to be demolished, relocated or retains distinct from new piping. Show building
floor plan, structural members, lights and major equipment occupying the same horizontal
plane as the fire protection piping. Draw sections to show relative elevations of piping,
ductwork, process equipment, beams, etc. The shop drawings shall contain, as a
minimum, the information outlined and listed in NFPA 13. Submit fire sprinkler drawings
and hydraulic calculations to each Authority Having Jurisdiction for review and respond to
any review comments from AHJ prior to starting work. Final design shall incorporate all
requirements of the AHJ. Work only from reviewed documents.
C. Hydraulic Calculations: Design of existing fire sprinkler system is based on the light
hazard pipe schedule method. In accordance with NFPA 13 11.2.2.3(1), pipe schedule is
used to determine required size for new fire sprinkler piping. No hydraulic calculations
will be required for fire sprinkler system remodel. Furnish complete hydraulic calculations
for the hydraulically most remote area of each different occupancy classification or
required design density.
D. Submittal Procedure: Submit a minimum of 2 copies of the fire sprinkler drawings,
calculations and equipment data to the Rexburg City Fire Department for review. Submit
6 copies of the fire sprinkler drawings, calculations and equipment data to the Owner.
The Owner will distribute drawings to the Project Engineer, Project Architect and the
insurance carrier (2 copies each). Contractor shall respond to all review comments
received from each reviewing authority and shall incorporate all necessary drawing
revisions on the shop drawings prior to beginning fabrication or installation.
E. Upon completion of system installation, the contractor shall document a 2-inch drain test,
inspect the general system installation and verify the installation is complete and installed
according to the approved drawings and specifications. Minor corrections and/or
additions to the drawings should be “red-lined” on the As-Built drawings. Contractor shall
submit As-Built drawings, and test certificates to Owner and to Architect.
F. Fabrication or installation shall not proceed until all required approvals have been
obtained.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Remodel the existing fire sprinkler system per NFPA 13 and FM Global Data Sheets to
provide fire protection of all remodel areas of the building. Fire sprinkler system design
shall conform to project drawings and these specifications. Work includes but is not
limited to the following:
1. Adjust, add, and/or remove sprinklers, mains, branch lines and other fire sprinkler
system components or devices as required to meet the remodel conditions.
Complete sprinkler coverage shall be provided throughout the remodel areas as
indicated on plans.
2. Existing fire sprinkler piping may remain where piping will be concealed above
new ceilings.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 3
3. Piping shall be concealed above ceilings where ceilings are present and may be
run exposed in areas without ceilings. Coordinate elevation and layout of piping
with mechanical, structural, electrical and plumbing equipment. Offset piping as
necessary to avoid conflicts.
4. Provide additional sprinklers below mechanical ducts, fixed equipment, platforms
and similar exposed obstructions over 48" wide.
5. Provide auxiliary drains in accordance with NFPA 13 to facilitate drainage of all
trapped portions of system piping.
6. Provide an express drain from the test/drain valve of each fire sprinkler zone
control assembly to extend discharge of test/drain valve to exterior of building.
Size of drain piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.
1.6 SYSTEM DESIGNS:
A. Design densities and areas of application:
1. Mechanical equipment, storage, custodial, utility tunnels and similar areas:
Ordinary hazard group 1, 0.15 gpm/sq. ft over 2,500 sq ft (or largest area) with
250 gpm hose allowance.
2. All other areas: Light hazard, 0.10 gpm/sq. ft over 1,500 sq. ft with 250 gpm
hose allowance1.Existing fire sprinkler system is hydraulically designed to protect
a hazard classification of Light Hazard. Existing fire sprinkler risers, mains and
branch lines will remain and will be used to supply relocated fire sprinklers.
Since existing fire sprinkler system has already been hydraulically proven to
protect the hazard classification present, no additional hydraulic calculations will
be required.
B. Maximum coverage per sprinkler head:
1. Ordinary Hazard: 130 sq. ft.
2. Light Hazard: 225 sq. ft.
3. Sprinkler spacing may exceed that listed above where extended coverage
sprinklers are used. Spacing for extended coverage sprinklers shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s cut sheet for the specific sprinkler used.
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. Materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be free from defects for 12 months from the
"Date Left in Service with All Control Valves Open," shown on "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate." If any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without
cost to Owner, and in accordance with Owner's instructions, either correct such defective
Work, or if it has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with non-
defective Work. Submit two copies of Warranty Certificates to Architect.
1.8 REFERENCES:
A. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems".
B. IBC (International Building Code), 2018.
C. IFC (International Fire Code), 2018 and any local amendments.
D. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Protection Equipment Directory," current edition.
E. Factory Mutual Systems "Approval Guide," current edition.
F. FM Global Data Sheet 2-8, Earthquake Protection for Water Based Fire Protection
Systems, current edition.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 4
G. FFM Global Data Sheet 2-0, Installation Guidelines for Automatic Sprinklers, current
edition.M Global Data Sheet 2-8N, Installation of Fire Sprinkler Systems, current edition.
H. FM Global Data Sheet 3-26, Fire Protection Water Demand, current edition.
I. Brigham Young University - Idaho “Minimum Fire Sprinkler Design Criteria”, Current
Issue
1.9 RELATED WORK:
A. Painting.
B. Electrical Materials and Methods.
C. Fire Alarm and Detection.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Materials, devices and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed or Factory
Mutual approved for use in fire protection systems.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers of sprinkler equipment, heads and devices:
1. Reliable
2. Victaulic
2.2 PIPE:
A. Interior Piping:
1. All new piping shall be steel Schedule 40, manufactured in the United States,
and shall meet or exceed the following standards: ASTM A795, ANSI/ASTM A53,
ASTM A135, ANSI B36-10M, UL CRR (Corrosion Resistance Rating) minimum
1.0 for threaded pipe. Thin wall pipe substitutes are not allowed.
2.3 FITTINGS:
A. Interior Piping:
1. Cast iron threaded, ANSI B16.4.
2. Cast iron flanged, ANSI B16.1.
3. Malleable iron threaded, ANSI B16.3.
4. Forged steel fittings, socket welded and threaded, ANSI B16.11.
5. Plain end couplings and fittings, saddle couplings, and clamp type couplings are
not acceptable.
6. Other types of fittings may be used, but only those investigated and listed for this
service and approved by the project engineer.
7. All fittings shall be of domestic manufacture.
2.4 HANGERS:
A. Hangers shall conform to the minimum requirements of NFPA 13.
2.5 SEISMIC FITTINGS AND BRACES:
A. Earthquake bracing is required on all new feed or cross mains and shall conform to the
minimum requirements of NFPA 13 and FM Global Data Sheet 2-8.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 5
2.6 SPRINKLERS:
A. Areas without ceilings: Small frame pendent or upright, ordinary temperature, brass,
glass bulb.
B. Sprinklers of intermediate and high temperature ratings shall be installed near skylights
and/or other specific locations as required by NFPA 13.
C. One spare head of each type for spare head cabinet and one head wrench for each type
sprinkler.
D. Provide quick response type sprinkler heads in accordance with NFPA 13 in all light
hazard areas.
2.7 VALVES:
A. Fire Sprinkler Riser: Existing to remain.
B. Fire Department Connections: Existing to remain.
C. Fire Sprinkler Zone Control Assemblies: Existing to remain.
2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION: Existing to remain.
2.9 ALARM DEVICES: Existing to remain.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire sprinkler system is to be installed and
notify General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an
acceptable manner.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Install system in compliance with methods detailed in NFPA 13 and FM Global Data
Sheets, including seismic requirements for potential for earthquake damage.
B. Offset as needed for existing building elements. Avoid conflict in congested areas. Run
mains in beam and truss space where space between bottom of truss is insufficient. Do
not obstruct access to lights or other ceiling mounted equipment.
C. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover and protect
components of the system against dirt and chemical or mechanical injury.
D. Provide concrete splash blocks for drains and test valve discharge, etc. Concrete splash
blocks shall be pre-fabricated, 2-1/2" thick, Amcor or Engineer app.
E. Water filled piping shall only be installed in areas where temperatures will not drop below
40ºF. If piping must be installed in unheated areas, provide an auxiliary dry-pipe system
of antifreeze filled piping per the requirements of NFPA 13.
F. Contractor is responsible for making his own job check and any necessary adjustments in
the design prior to fabrication. Make final coordination with other trades and offset piping
and heads as necessary. Major conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the General
Contractor for resolution by the Architect.
G. Phase modifications of existing fire sprinkler system to minimize disruption to fire
sprinkler protection in the building. Existing fire sprinkler system may only be taken out of
service while the fire sprinkler contractor is on premise actively working on fire sprinkler
system.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 6
H. Submit piping and equipment data sheets for review by the Owner/Engineer prior to start
of the installation.
I. Provide chrome escutcheons around exposed piping where piping passes through walls,
roof or floors.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Obtain permits and post bonds as required by state and local AHJ's (Authorities Having
Jurisdiction).
B. Inform AHJ's of job progress. Request presence of AHJ’s, perform tests, and document
results using Contractor's Material and Test Certificates.
3.4 TESTING:
A. Make and pay for all tests required by applicable codes during and after completion of the
work and correct and defects in the systems indicated by the tests.
B. Hydrostatically test all new system piping for two hours at 200 psi with no loss in pressure
and no visible leakage. Conduct the testing after all of the fire sprinkler heads and piping
are installed. Have the tests witnessed by the AHJ's and Engineer. Submit a
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate to the Architect upon successful completion of
the testing.
C. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel in the proper operation, testing and
maintenance of all installed equipment.
D. Conduct an inspection and operational test (main drain and inspector's test) at the end of
the one-year guarantee period. The inspection and testing shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 25. A written report is to be sent to the
Owner.
3.5 DISINFECTION:
A. Introduce dosage of 50 PPM chlorine in overhead piping. During the contact period open
and close all system valves several times. At end of 24-hour retention period at least 10
PPM shall remain throughout the piping.
B. At end of retention period, flush system until residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0
PPM.
3.6 CLEANING:
A. Remove oil, scale, debris, and foreign substances from interior and exterior of devices,
equipment, and materials prior to installation.
B. Upon job completion, remove tools, surplus materials and equipment, leaving all areas
broom clean.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE:
A. Acceptance of installation is subject to final inspection and approval by:
1. Owner BYU Idaho Risk Management
2. Rexburg City Fire Department
3. Architect and/or Engineer
4. FM Global Insurance
END OF SECTION 211313
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
SANITARY WASTE & VENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 1300 - 1
SECTION 22 1300
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section specifies building sanitary, waste and vent, and equipment, vent and drain piping
systems, including drains and drainage specialties.
B. Related Sections:
1. Separate sections in Division 2 specify sanitary sewage systems and trenching and
backfilling. Provide a complete transition between work components.
2. Separate sections in Division 7 specify flashing and sheet metal and joint sealers.
3. Division 22 Plumbing section applies to the work of this section.
4. Separate sections of Division 22 specify Basic Piping Materials and Methods, Hangers and
Supports, Expansion Compensation, piping system identification materials and
requirements, pipe insulation, and plumbing equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of plumbing piping products and equipment of
types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in service for not less than
five years.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Firm with at least three years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature.
2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Idaho.
3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all
other work in progress by the Contractor.
4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or
apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical literature indicating source, brand, type, model,
performance characteristics, installation instructions, etc. Color chart for finished surfaces and
fixtures.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
SANITARY WASTE & VENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 1300 - 2
B. Record Drawings: See Section 230000.
C. Operation And Maintenance Information: Provide information for all equipment including a
comprehensive system operating description. See Section 23 01 00.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices.
1. State Boiler and Pressure Vessel Regulations
2. ASME Codes for Boilers and Pressure Vessels
3. Uniform Plumbing Code – Current Edition
4. International Building Code
5. International Mechanical Code
6. Americans with Disabilities Act.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Coordinate the installation of floor drains, floor sinks and floor/roof penetrations.
B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining substrate work.
C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain
elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.
D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains
with drainage piping systems.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT SYSTEMS:
A. Sanitary Soil Drain, Waste and Vent Piping: (Below Grade)
1. Piping: To conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888 or ASTM A-
74 and shall be cast iron soil pipe and fittings supplied by AB&I, Charlotte Pipe or Tyler
Pipe.
2. Joints for Hubless Pipe: Hubless pipe and fittings joints shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM Standard C-564 and Factory Mutual Standard 1680 and shall be heavy duty
type 304 stainless steel full shielded couplings having 4 sealing clamps for pipe sizes 1
½” thru 4" and 6 sealing clamps for pipe sizes 5" thru 15" as supplied by AB&I, Husky,
Charlotte Pipe or Tyler.
3. Joints for Hub and Spigot Pipe: Hub and Spigot pipe and fittings joints shall be installed
with compression gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-564 as
supplied by Charlotte Pipe or Tyler Pipe.
B. Sanitary Soil Drain, Waste and Vent Piping: (Above Grade Only)
1. Piping: To conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888 or ASTM A-
74 and shall be cast iron soil pipe and fittings as supplied by AB&I, Charlotte Pipe or
Tyler Pipe.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
SANITARY WASTE & VENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 1300 - 3
2. Joints for Hubless Pipe: Hubless pipe and fittings joints shall conform to the requirements
of CISPI Standard 310, ASTM Standard C-564 and local code requirements as supplied
by AB&I, Husky, Charlotte Pipe or Tyler.
3. Joints for Hub and Spigot Pipe: Hub and Spigot pipe and fittings joints shall be installed
with compression gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-564 as
supplied by Charlotte Pipe or Tyler Pipe.
4. Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with drainage pattern cast iron screwed fittings.
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM VENTS AND DRAINS:
A. Piping:
1. Piping on closed side of system to match primary system served.
2. Open vent and drain piping of Schedule 40 galvanized steel or Type K or L copper.
B. Valves: Provide valves appropriate for duty.
1. Locate air vent valves accessibly mounted on wall, 5'-0" above floor, extended to drain.
C. Installation Notes:
1. Slope all drains at 1/4" per foot or more.
2. Provide complete condensate drain systems for all air handling units, etc., for all
equipment which has a need for such service.
Terminate such drain systems near floor drains, floor sinks or other authorized point of
discharge.
2.3 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. VENT FLASHING AND TERMINATION:
1. Vent pipes penetrating the roof shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with sheet
flashing. Flashing shall weigh at least 6 pounds per square foot, shall be square and shall
be turned up around the pipe and into the top of the pipe. Vent pipes shall extend at least
12" above roof. Use cast iron flashing clamps for pipe smaller than 3" rather than turning
lead into pipe.
B. TRAPS: Each fixture and piece of equipment connecting to the drainage system shall be
equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as near to the fixture as possible and no fixture
shall be double trapped.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
SANITARY WASTE & VENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 1300 - 4
3.EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and
specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original
design, and the referenced standards.
B. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to
installations.
C. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
D. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and
specialties are to be installed.
E. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS:
A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout
the length of the pipe.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid
and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill
unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the
pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.3 JOINING PIPES AND FITTINGS:
A. Copper Tubing: Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in ANSI B9.1.
B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make lead and oakum caulked joints, compression joints, and hubless joints
in accordance with the recommendations in the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,
Chapter IV.
3.4 INSTALLATION:
A. Refer to the separate Division 22 section: Basic Piping Materials and Methods, for general piping
installation instructions.
B. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division-22 Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Supports and Anchors".
C. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the
general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping
layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as
indicated.
D. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45-degree wyes, half-
wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter
bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is
from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed back to back
and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbow, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
SANITARY WASTE & VENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 1300 - 5
change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of
drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reducers.
Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with
the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning
at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation
requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.
F. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2 percent) for piping 3" and
smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1 percent) for piping 4" and larger.
G. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Sewer piping is specified in a separate section of Division 33.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Install flexible connection joints on roof drains.
B. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated,
and:
1. as required by plumbing code;
2. each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees;
3. at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping;
4. at base of each vertical soil or waste stack.
C. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout cover for concealed piping, types as indicated.
D. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout
passing through waterproof membranes.
E. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Vent Cap: Install on all vents terminating through the sidewall. Secure to vent.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS:
A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations
indicated.
B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains
flush with finished floor.
C. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.7 CONNECTIONS:
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and
drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
SANITARY WASTE & VENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 22 1300 - 6
plumbing code.
B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at
least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified
below in the presence of the plumbing official.
3. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or
closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.
4. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests
specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.
5. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the
required corrections, and arrange for reinspected by the plumbing official.
6. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.
B. Piping System Test:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems. If testing is
performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of
the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing, that
has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.10 PROTECTION:
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FLOOR DRAINS 22 1426 - 1
SECTION 221426
FLOOR DRAINS
1.GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. This Section specifies plumbing fixtures and trim. The types of fixtures specified includes the
following:
1. Floor Drains
2.PRODUCTS
2.01 FIXTURES:
A. Floor Drains:
1. (FD-1) Fixture:
a. 6" diameter nickel bronze strainer, cast iron body with 2" outlet and deep seal P-
trap, clamping collar.
b. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Zurn No. ZN-415.
2) Josam No. 30000 -A
3) J.R. Smith No. 2010
4) Wade No. 1100 Series
5) Mifab F1100
6) Watts 200-A
3.EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed in
accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced
standards.
B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the
referenced standards.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FLOOR DRAINS 22 1426 - 2
B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with respect to
plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation.
B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. Clean fixtures, using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.
3.5 PROTECTION:
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1
SECTION 23 0000
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Sections of other Divisions which relate to mechanical work apply to the work of this section. See
various Sections on sitework, underfloor work, structural work, finish materials, etc.
B. Related Sections: Refer to “Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment” Section in
Division 23 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Special and specific
electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification section.
1.2 SUMMARY: This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes
requirements common to more than one section of Division 23. It expands and supplements the
requirements of Division 01.
This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described herein is a part of
the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: The mechanical work described in these mechanical specifications is for
a project located at Brigham Young University Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho. Design weather conditions are:
89o db, 61o wb, and winter -30oF. Altitude readings, unless otherwise noted, are for an elevation of 4,950
feet above sea level. Make adjustment to manufacturer's performance data as needed.
1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION:
A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the
various codes, ordinances and adoptions pertaining to the project location in effect on the date of
invitation for bids. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations and
ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or
construction in excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications shall govern.
B. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and Architect/Engineer free and harmless from
liability of any nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances.
C. Permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract shall be secured and paid
for by the contractor(s) include connection fees related to utility hookups. Contractor shall include
all sewer connection fees and shall verify current rate with Rexburg City prior to bid.
D. REFERENCE STANDARDS:
American Welding Society
International Mechanical Code/State Code
International Building Code/State Code
International Energy Conservation Code
SMACNA Duct Design Standards
Local/State Plumbing Code
Locally enforced NFPA Codes
Local Fuel Utility Regulations
Local Power Utility Regulations
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2
American Gas Association
ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping
ANSI B31.1 Piping
E. Final inspection by the Architect/Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial
Completion issued until certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having jurisdiction are
delivered.
1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The mechanical drawings at reduced scale show the
general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as the actual
building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The architectural and structural drawings
shall be considered as part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information
relating to design and construction of the building. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over
mechanical drawings. Request clarification and participate in resolution in the event of conflict.
Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and
arrange the work accordingly, providing such extensions, fittings, valves and accessories to meet the
conditions as may be required. Some small scale work is not shown such as control conduit and piping,
incidental piping, specialties. Provide as directed by note or specification.
Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the conditions under
which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure to make such examination.
During construction, verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work at the building. No extra
compensation shall be claimed or allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and those
indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for perfect
efficiency, and report any work of other trades which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for
defective work shall be claimed nor allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the
mechanical work.
1.6 ROUGH-IN:
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 35 for rough-in requirements.
1.7 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
installations.
D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior
to closing-in the building.
F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of
mechanical equipment and materials.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3
G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum
of interference with other installations.
I. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with
suspension systems, light fixtures, existing structures and other installations.
J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies,
and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
K. Where mechanical work penetrates other trade work such as gypboard walls, etc., penetration
shall be neatly cut and walls shall be filled and patched.
L. All materials exposed within a return air plenum shall either be noncombustible or have a
maximum flame spread index of 25 and a max smoke developed index of 50.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY:
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final
location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
require replacement or servicing.
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and maintenance.
Respect manufacturers recommendations for access and clearance.
D. Access Doors - General: All items of mechanical equipment which may require adjustment,
maintenance, replacement or which control a system function shall be made readily accessible to
personnel operating the building.
1. Provide access doors in all ductwork or plenums as required to maintain fire dampers,
fire smoke dampers, equipment, controls or other elements of the system. Doors shall
conform to SMACNA standards unless otherwise detailed or specified. Refer to Section
23 33 00 for sizes.
2. Provide access doors in floors, walls, ceiling and partitions to valves, cleanouts, chases,
dampers, etc., and to access doors in ductwork requiring the same. Access doors shall
be all-steel construction equivalent to "Milcor" by Inland Ryerson in a style approved by
the Owner's Representative. Doors shall be 24" x 24" minimum, or larger as needed,
with screwdriver latches.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS: See General Conditions.
1.10 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION: These documents outline a way in which the Owner
may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and specifications describe reasonable
engineering practice for the Contractor to follow.
Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that indicated, but
in no case shall the intended function be compromised.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 4
The Contractor may perceive some work methods which differ from those specified which could save time
and effort. These may be presented to the Architect with a breakdown of possible cost savings for
review. Implement only with authorization.
Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After bidding,
substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of definitive cost accounting and implemented only with
authorization.
1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and blockouts,
and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate mechanical installations.
Cut and patch only as needed.
B. Refer to the Division 01 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general requirements for cutting
and patching.
C. Refer to Division 26 Section: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for requirements for cutting
and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials.
D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and
patching.
E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged as a result of mechanical
installations.
F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated
by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work;
2. Remove and replace defective Work;
3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents;
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing:
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
H. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for
Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.
I. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials
as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping and other mechanical
items made obsolete by the new Work.
J. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to
be removed.
K. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust
and dirt to adjacent areas.
1.12 SUBMITTALS: Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only from the
Contractor to the Architect. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the
Architect/Engineer will not be processed. Document each transmittal and sign and stamp the submittal
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 5
indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with the criteria of the project, any exceptions
being clearly noted.
A. Shop Drawings: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the Architect,
electronic copies of the descriptive literature covering all equipment and materials to be used in
the installation of mechanical systems for this project. Written confirmation of acceptable review
by the Owner's Representative shall be obtained before ordering, purchasing, acquiring or
installing any such equipment or materials for the project.
Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification. Submitted
literature shall clearly indicate performance, quality, utility requirements, dimensions of size,
connection points and other information pertinent to effective review.
Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. The
Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for equipment installed.
Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be furnished with
unit.
Review of the Architect/Engineer is for general conformance of the submitted equipment of the
project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his obligation to furnish
equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification, nor does it relieve the
Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions and conditions which may affect
his work.
B. Record Drawings: During the course of construction, maintain a set of drawings, specifications,
change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and upon which all deviations from
the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked-up documents over to the Architect/Engineer
at the conclusion of the work so that the original tracings can be revised. If the Contractor fails to
mark up the prints, reimburse the Architect/Engineer for time required to do so.
1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING:
A. Refer to Section 019113.
1.14 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY: The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is binding on the
part of the Contractor and his assigns:
"Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract and is free
from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period
of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General Conditions of these specifications. Failed
equipment in the repair or replacement shall be guaranteed for one full year from the date of
recommission."
Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl covered, insert
sheets, tabulated and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M Manual.
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of
beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone
numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
Mechanical systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and initiation of
warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction for at least thirty (30)
working days.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 6
1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a
representative of the Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the Contractor and Representative.
Involve local authorities where required.
1.16 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Refer to General Conditions. See Paragraph 1.4.
1.17 CEILING SPACE COORDINATION: Carefully coordinate ceiling cavity space with all trades; however,
installation of mechanical equipment within the ceiling cavity space allocation, in the event of conflict,
shall be in the following order: plumbing waste lines; supply, return and exhaust ductwork; domestic hot
and cold water; fire protection; control conduit. Respect clearances required for lights, electrical conduits,
protected structure, etc. All spaces above any and all ceilings shall be defined and considered as return
air plenum space.
1.18 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS: For the fan rooms, steam to heating water, water
converter room, congested areas, or areas of great detail, prepare and submit a set of coordination
drawings showing major elements, components and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in
relationship with other building components (structure, fire sprinkler, electrical, etc.). Prepare drawings to
an accurate scale of 1/4" - 1-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including
clearances for installing and maintaining equipment, servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem
movement, and similar requirements. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the
building during construction.
Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections and details to conclusively coordinate and
integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and
coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work, including (but not
necessarily limited to) the following:
A. Fan rooms:
1. Customized Air Handling Units.
2. Supply and relief air fans, plenums, etc.
3. Cooling coils, heating coils, filters, etc.
4. Relief Fans.
5. Electrical installations.
6. Related structure.
B. Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels.
C. Exterior wall penetrations.
D. Ceiling and floor plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested
arrangement. To include structure, ductwork, piping, fire protection, large electrical conduit,
recessed lights, etc.
E. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and junctures.
F. Pipe expansion loops.
G. Numbered valve location diagrams.
H. Exterior underground lines in common excavation.
I. Manifold piping for multiple equipment units.
J. General floor plan layouts with ductwork, piping, lighting, structure, etc.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 7
K. Use drawings to coordinate all affected trades. Do not work without coordinated drawings.
1.19 SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work
of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine the Owners acceptable
downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Give notice of a necessary utility
interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to the owner’s construction coordinator not less than 72
hours prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then be coordinated with the Campus Utility Services
Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go ahead with the shutdown or re-schedule.
Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as necessary to accomplish the work with minimum
disruption.
2.GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. All equipment and materials shall be new, and shall be the standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning
equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Specific equipment shown in
schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis for the Contractor's bid. Provisions
for substitute equipment are outlined in the General Conditions. All materials shall be produced
by manufacturing plants located in the United States of America.
B. Furnish and install all major items of equipment specified in the equipment schedules on the
drawings complete with all accessories normally supplied with catalog items listed, and all other
accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.
2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Close pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgement of dirt or trash during the
course of installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water and chemical or
mechanical injury. Plumbing fixtures intended for the final installation shall not be used by the
construction forces. At the completion of the work, clean fixtures, equipment and materials and
polish thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make
damage and defects developing before acceptance of the work good at Contractor's expense.
B. Do not make temporary use of project equipment, new or existing, during construction without the
written consent of the owner. SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT.
2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN:
A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them. Apprentices
may be used with appropriate direction.
B. Employ no unskilled persons in the work which he is given to do; execute all work in a skillful and
workmanlike manner. All persons employed upon this work shall be competent, faithful, orderly
and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner's Representative deem anyone employed on
the work incompetent or unfit for his duties, and so certify, Contractor shall dismiss him and he
shall not be again employed upon the work without permission of the Owner's Representative.
C. All welders involved in welding of pressure piping systems shall be certified in accordance with
Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Written verification of successful test
completion shall be submitted to Architect prior to initiating work.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 8
2.4 FOREMAN: Dedicate and designate a full-time general mechanical foreman to the Owner's
Representative to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for consultation. Do not
replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's Representative.
2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS: Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate purchasing between
trades so that equipment and materials of similar nature come from a single vendor, i.e., all package
HVAC terminal units shall be common source. Valves, terminal boxes, speed drives, etc., the same. Do
not burden the Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so directed.
2.6 ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS - FLASHINGS:
A. Install sleeves through the floor into “dry rooms” flush with the floor, caulked and sealed. Into wet
rooms, extend piping to create 1" dam. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for all pipe
sleeves.
B. Let pipe sleeves allow for movement of the pipe due to expansion and contraction, yet to include
seismic restraint.
C. Refer to Section “FIRE STOPPING” for requirements.
D. Flashings:
1. Flash all pipes penetrating the roof. Provide required flashing components.
2. Clamp roof drains to roof membrane, follow manufacturer's directions.
3. Flash and counterflash other piping penetrating the roof. See drawings or
Architect/Engineer for additional detail.
4. Make all ductwork penetrating the roof watertight with flashings, counterflashing and
sealant. Provide curbs for all such openings.
2.7 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING (GENERAL):
A. Provide all excavation, trenching and backfilling for Division 23 underground piping work.
Excavation and backfilling shall comply with applicable paragraphs of Division 31. Tamp bottoms
of trenches hard and, for soil and waste piping, grade to secure uniform fall of 1/4" per foot, or as
noted. Excavate bell holes for hub and spigot pipes so that pipe rests on solid ground for its
entire length. Lay sewer and water pipe in separate trenches, except where otherwise noted, as
detailed.
B. After work has been tested, inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative and/or
State/Local Inspector, and prior to backfilling, clean the excavation of all rubbish, and clean
backfill materials free of trash. Place backfill in horizontal layers not exceeding 12" in thickness,
properly moistened. Mechanically compact each layer with suitable equipment to a dry density of
not less than 95 percent as determined by the Modified AASHO Test T-18O. See Division 31 for
additional requirements.
1. Provide adequate shoring to safeguard workers from cave-ins for all excavations.
2. In areas where General Contractor has finish grade work to do, Mechanical Contractor
shall backfill and compact to 8" below finish grade. Where no finish surface work is to be
done, Mechanical Contractor shall backfill and compact to and match adjacent
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 9
undisturbed surface with allowance for settling, etc.
3. Protect from damage all existing underground utilities or utility tunnels indicated on the
contract drawings (or field located for the Contractor by the Owner prior to excavation
operations). Any damage to identified existing utilities or utility tunnels shall be repaired
by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL):
A. Provide hangers and/or supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork. Primary information is
contained in these specifications and on the drawings.
B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint and vibration isolation.
2.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment in strict accordance with directions and
recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans and
specifications, report such conflicts to the Architect who shall direct adjustments as deemed necessary
and desirable.
2.10 LUBRICATION: Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the operation of all
equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held responsible for all damage to
equipment and bearings while the equipment is being operated by him consequent to preacceptance
operation.
2.11 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL:
A. In general, motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on the
electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed under Division 26 of
this Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically mentioned to be furnished by
the Division 23 either in these specifications or on the electrical or mechanical drawings, shall be
furnished and mounted by this Contractor and shall be connected under and as required by this
Division 23 and Division 26 of these specifications.
B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions
required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor.
C. Division must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to insure that all required components of the
work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result
of lack of coordination.
D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the Mechanical
Contractor shall furnish, install and wire or have prewired all specified and necessary controls for
air handling equipment specified for this project. The objective of this paragraph is to make sure
a complete operating system is obtained at no additional cost to the Owner for field wiring
required related to the equipment.
2.12 FLUSHING AND DRAINING OF SYSTEMS/CLEANING OF PIPING AND DUCTS: Fill, clean and flush
and sterilize where appropriate, all water piping systems with water and drain these systems before they
are placed in operation. Flushings shall consist of not less than six (6) short, intermittent flushes of five
(5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each flush for cleanliness.Blow out all other piping
systems with compressed air or nitrogen to remove foreign materials that may have been left or deposited
in the piping system during its erection. Duct systems shall have all debris removed and fans shall be run
to blow out all dust and foreign matter before grilles, outlets or mixing boxes are installed and connected.
Damp wipe all ductwork on installation, cap open ducts, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 10
installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
2.13 JOBSITE CLEANUP:
A. Keep site clean during progress of work.
B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly.
1. Leave equipment in a factory dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up or
repaint if necessary.
2. Remove all debris from site.
2.14 ARCHITECTURAL ACCESS DOORS:
A. Extent of Work: Provide architectural grade access doors at each point of required access to duct
features, piping valves, and specialties, concealed equipment, etc. Coordinate this work with
other sections for ceilings, walls, etc.
B. Material: Steel framed doors with heavy duty hinges and latch type locking mechanisms with
surface finish configuration to accept, match or correlate with adjacent surface.
1. Product equivalent to Inland-Ryerson “Milcor”, Cesco
2. Size adequate to access point of maintenance, to work on and remove concealed
devices and equipment.
C. Installation: Complete, blended into adjacent work.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 0100 - 1
SECTION 23 0100
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish two sets of bound and four discs of the operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals
shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and
detail the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of
approved submittals shall be included for all equipment.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:
A. General:
1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings and data
that the owner requires for each building or project. These manuals and discs, complete
with drawings and data, shall be furnished to BYU Idaho Physical Plant.
2. The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data and
compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or equipment purchased
by the University and delivered to the contractor for installation.
3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of information
to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A.
4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model,
type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed.
B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference to all
important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is also to
provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel. It is also to
provide information required for checking equipment performance or for planning of plant
expansion or redesign.
2.MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 PAGE SIZE: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably 16 x
11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch.
2.2 DRAWINGS: All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-1/2" x 11"
manilla pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the binders. The
equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of each manilla pocket.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 0100 - 2
2.3 BINDERS: Binders shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 3 ring ridged type “D” with clear plastic cover and backbone
for slip in title information 2" to 3" rings as required for the project. The number of binders, however, shall
be based on not filling them beyond 2-1/2" thickness.
A. Place the following information on 8-1/2” x 11” white paper to slip into plastic covers on front and
backbone:
1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume).
3. Project Number (Seven Digit University project number).
4. Building name and number.
5. “BYU Idaho”.
6. Architect's name.
7. Engineer's name.
8. General Contractor's name.
9. Mechanical Contractor's name.
10. Items 6 through 8 need not be printed on the backbone.
2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING:
A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately
indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation.
B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section
additional indexing of component parts may be required.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible information
pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as
follows:
1. Copy of purchase order change (if any).
2. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as built” electrical wiring and control
diagrams for all major and supplementary systems.
3. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves.
4. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and
sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan
number.
5. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on
component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured
directly by him, shall also be included.
6. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the model
numbers and plan symbols.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 0100 - 3
7. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index
dividers into the following suggested parts:
a. Part I Building and System Descriptions
b. Part II Purchased Equipment Data
c. Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts
d. Part IV Start-Up and Operation
e. Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations
8. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment.
9. A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports.
10. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol.
11. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if
different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 1
SECTION 23 0505
MECHANICAL FIRESTOPPING
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and General Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY: This section includes firestopping for the following:
A. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor construction including openings containing
wires/cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
B. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including openings containing
wires/cables, pipes, ducts, control conduits, and other penetrating items.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire,
according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems
with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or
exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems
with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and
where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable
floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:
1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
3. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch diameter nominal
pipe or 16 square inch in overall cross-sectional area.
D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as
determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance
rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.
E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do
not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-
resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and General Conditions
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 2
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to
building occupants.P
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
D. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting
agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing
of current products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following
requirements and those specified under the “System Performance Requirements” article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing
testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under
conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is
maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating
items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements.
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their “Fire
Resistance Directory,” by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration firestop
systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are
expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require
the Architect’s prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed
substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience installer who has completed firestopping that is
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project and that has performed
successfully.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of
penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.
E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method
specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, “Polarized Light Microscopy.”
F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that
designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver firestopping products to project site in original, unopened containers or packages with
intact and legible manufacturers’ labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of
manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency’s
classification marking applicable to project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multi-
component materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 3
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are
outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain,
frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturer’s instructions by natural means
or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.8 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL:
A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other,
the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1. Use only
components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and
inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are
not limited to the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
a. Semi-refractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.
b. Ceramic fiber.
c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent
leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
d. Fire-rated formboard.
e. Joint fillers for joint sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this section that
comply with system performance and other requirements.
1.9 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS:
A. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
B. Intumescent Putty: Non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
C. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side.
D. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component,
synthetic-polymer-based sealant.
E. Intumescent Metal-Faced Sheets: Single-component, intumescent sheet with 28-gauge steel
bonded to one side.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 4
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Intumescent Latex Sealant:
a. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
2. Intumescent Putty:
a. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Intumescent Wrap Strips:
a. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products.
4. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants:
a. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products.
5. Intumescent Metal-Faced Sheets:
a. 3M Fire Barrier Composite Sheet CS195, 3M Fire Protection Products.
1.10 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance
of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1.11 PREPARATION:
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to
comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from
penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that
manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
1.12 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS:
A. General: Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1 and the through-
penetration firestop manufacturer’s installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products
and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After
installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated
as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 5
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
1.13 CLEANING:
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and
of products in which opening and joints occur.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and
install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 1
SECTION 23 0513
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and
electrical connections are specified in Division 26.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for motors and drives furnished by this Division and
for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.
Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and
disconnect switches, etc.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical
equipment are noted within these documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide electrical components and materials which are UL labeled.
B. Provide variable speed drives which conform to the latest standard of the following:
1. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
2. NEC - National Electrical Code.
3. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
4. Provide complete packaged unit(s) which are listed and carry the label of at least one of
the following:
a. UL - Underwriters Laboratory
b. ETL - ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.
c. CSA - Canadian Standards Association
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit complete product and application information for variable speed drives as follows:
1. Provide multiple sets of drawings of system (VFD) being supplied, in strict compliance
with the specifications. Include, as a minimum:
a. General arrangement of each unit showing size and incoming and outgoing
conduit locations.
b. Schematic diagrams and drawings.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 2
c. Connection diagram, sufficient to install drive system.
2. Provide each unit with four owner/maintenance manuals which shall include:
a. Vendor information of equipment being supplied.
b. Connection information.
c. Start up procedure.
d. Fault reset instruction.
e. Wiring diagrams (power and control).
f. Parts list.
g. Test results.
h. Harmonic voltage distortion on line with unit off.
i. Harmonic voltage distortion with unit on line.
B. Submit product data for motors, belts, drives, starters, and other electrical components
with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the
individual equipment specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with
submittal. Confirm suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service
factor. Include this data in maintenance manual in accordance with Section "Operation
and Maintenance Manuals".
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.
B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
D. NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
E. IEEE Standard 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems.
F. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
1.6 WARRANTY:
A. General: For variable frequency drives. Furnish a written warranty consisting of the
following:
1. Warranty parts and labor for five years after substantial completion.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 3
A. Motor scheduled for connection to variable frequency drives shall be invertor duty rated.
B. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors,
more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment
specifications.
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven
loads.
2. Motor sizes large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to
operate in the service factor range.
3. Two-speed motors with 2 separate windings for poly-phase motors. Confirm 2-
speed starter requirements with Division 26.
4. Single speed motors of the permanent split capacitor type. (PSC)
5. Temperature Rating: Minimum rate for 40
oC environment with maximum 90oC
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class H Insulation for altitude,
Class B leads allowed).
6. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control
system, and not less than 5 evenly timed spaced starts per hour for manually
controlled motors.
7. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0
for TEFC motors.
8. Pump motors with an end shield with ventilation openings beneath the motor.
9. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general Purpose, continuous duty,
design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
10. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment
manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.
11. Bearings:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals;
b. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally
inaccessible for regular maintenance;
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives
produce lateral or axial thrust in motor;
d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are
permitted.
e. Motors for use with Variable Frequency Drives shall have insulated
bearings or grounded shafts.
12. Enclosure Type:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 4
a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or
remotely located during operation;
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants;
c. Weather protected type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed;
13. Overload Protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated,
internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
14. Noise Rating: "Quiet"
15. Efficiency: "Premium Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency
as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency
not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard
industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. Motors used with
Variable Frequency Drives shall be compatible and designed for use with
Variable Frequency Drives. Any “explosion proof” motor for classified areas,
scheduled for use with VFD’s, shall be listed for invertor duty applications.
16. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer. ratings,
characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.
17. Acceptable Manufacturers: Baldor (Preferred), Century, General Electric,
Lincoln, Marathon, U.S. Motors.
2.2 MOTOR DRIVES:
A. Provide fan/motor drives with cast steel sheaves and V-belt sets of fabric and rubber
construction by Browning, Dodge, Woods. Match multiple belts and adjust to drive the
apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting. Design drives for
150 percent or more of the specified motor nameplate rating. Bush all drives. Belts shall
be A, B or C section belts. Narrow gauge belts are not acceptable. Adjust drives or
replace sheaves as needed to obtain required capacities.
B. Provide flexible coupled drives for pumps by Browning, Dodge or Woods.
C. Provide a galvanized iron metal guard for each V-belt drive, coupled drive or rotating
shaft constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus.
Design the guard to completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply
with all safety requirements. Provide hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" for
access to motor and fan shaft for test purposes. For double inlet fans, construct the belt
guard cover of 1/2" mesh expanded metal, arranged as not to restrict the air flow into the
fan inlet.
2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES:
A. General: Furnish and install Variable Frequency Drives (motor speed controllers) with
associated control signal components, harmonic filtering, power factor compensation and
related cabinets, devices, ventilation, etc. Sizes and capacity as schedule on the
drawings. Rate drives for constant torque application with variable torque application
capability. Drive shall be warrantied for parts and labor for 18 months after substantial
completion. Drives shall be wired for full VFD rating.
1. Verify compatibility of each VFD System being supplied with the related
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 5
equipment motor. If a new motor is being supplied supply the VFD to match the
new motor(s) and warranty the Drive to be compatible with that motor.
2. Furnish each system in a NEMA 1 enclosure either wall-mounted or free
standing, with fan forced, filtered ventilation.
3. Furnish each system with silk screened or engraved labels on all door operator
and pilot devices, attached with screws, rivets or adhesive.
4. Provide an electrical shock warning label on each system to warn personnel that
a potential of electric shock exists.
5. Supply each system complete, wired with all components assembled in a single
enclosure including, but not limited to the VFD units, contactors, door interlocked
circuit breaker. Units requiring mounting and inter-wiring of separate bypass
enclosure are not under this specification.
6. Supply a complete set of engineering drawings consisting of, as a minimum,
general arrangement, power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and
schematic of VFD System components, options, and equipment and tests
included to meet power quality requirements of the specification.
7. Furnish an owner's manual consisting of catalog sheets showing actual
components and parts numbers. Manual shall also show test certificates,
warranty and service personnel responsible for warranty.
8. Furnish factory trained VFD System installation and start-up and warranty
service. Mount unit and connect to power supply, mount and wire remote
devices.
B. Construction: Assemble the Variable Frequency Drive units and components in a NEMA
1 enclosure.
1. Each Variable Frequency Drive inverter shall be altitude compensated and sized
for the elevation at which the unit will be installed. The inverter shall operate in
an ambient temperature of -10°C to 50°C and a humidity of 0 to 90 percent non-
condensing.
2. Mount each Variable Frequency Drive inverter unit on a removable panel along
with all other components such that, if required, the panel can be removed from
the enclosure for maintenance or part replacement.
3. Mount the door with a minimum of two hinges with removable pins. Door shall be
rigid and large doors shall have additional hinges and stiffening steel.
4. Paint enclosure, two coats over primer, with high grade enamel, a minimum of
50-70 microns thick.
5. The enclosure shall be force ventilated and the exhaust ports covered with
louvers. All components of the system, except sensors, shall be contained in this
single enclosure as an integrated package.
6. Door mounted operator devices shall be industrial, oil tight, equivalent to control
center devices.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 6
7. Control power for operator devices and customer connections shall be 120 volts.
The control power transformer shall be a "Machine Tool" type and have both
primary and secondary fusing.
C. Standard Features: Provide the following features as standard on all VFD units
furnished.
1. Each VFD unit shall be a solid state AC to DC converter sinusoidal pulse-width
modulation (PWM) type, with an altitude adjusted horsepower rating equal to or
greater than the motor HP that the unit is supplying or not less than the
scheduled rating, whichever is greater.
2. Electrical characteristics:
a. Input Voltage 460 VAC +/- 10% (Nominal 480 Volts)
b. Input Frequency 60 Hz +/- 5%
3. Motor braking torque available by means of regenerative braking.
4. An output frequency clamp such that minimum or maximum output frequency can
be set at desired limits.
5. Rated overload current shall be 150% for one minute.
6. Each VFD shall have an adjustable acceleration/deceleration time setting from
one second to 120 seconds.
7. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better displacement power factor over
the entire speed range.
8. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better output/input efficiency over the
entire speed range.
9. Each VFD shall be supported with a door interlocked input disconnect motor
circuit protector. The MCP shall allow trip adjustment sufficient to start the motor
across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a minimum setting for
maximum protection in the VFD mode. The door mounted handle shall be
lockable in the off position.
10. Each VFD shall be supported with the following door mounted operator controls
as a minimum:
a. Hand/Off/Auto Switch - keyed switch required.
b. Local/Remote Switch - keyed switch required.
c. Frequency Setting - through programmable controller pad.
d. Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed - through
programmable controller pad.
e. Power on Light
f. VFD Enable Light
g. VFD Fault Light
h. External Fault Light (safeties interlock)
11. Each VFD shall be supplied with a minimum of the following protective features
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 7
with an alarm display indication:
a. Overcurrent Shut-off
b. Regenerative Overvoltage
c. Electronic Thermal Protector
d. Heat Sink Overheat
e. Instantaneous Power Failure
f. Ground Fault
12. The following termination points on terminal strip for field connections:
a. Safeties Interlock
b. Remote Start/Stop Contact
c. Remote VFD Fault Contacts (N.C.)
d. Remote VFD/Bypass Enable Contacts (N.O.)
e. Remote Electronic Signal Input
13. Auto restart initiation by means of an automatic time delayed restart after
recovering from under voltage or loss of power. The inverter shall have auto
restart compatibility with power provided by standby engine generator system
provide all required components to insure compatibility to operate on standby
engine power. The invertor shall not automatically restart after overcurrent,
overvoltage, over temperature, or any other damaging conditions but shall
require a manual restart.
14. Remote input signal connection terminals (0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC = 0-100%
speed or 4-20 mA = 20-100% Speed).
D. Additional Configuration Features:
1. Bypass Option: Equip the inverter with a manual bypass contactor arrangement
for transfer to the feeder line to operate at constant speed. The contactors shall
be electrically and mechanically interlocked and supplied with an adjustable
motor overload.
2. Provide a VFD isolation switch to allow maintenance on the VFD while in the
bypass mode. Furnish prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors,
VFD isolation switch, motor overload VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass
ON light.
3. Digital or Analog Ammeter, through programmable key pad.
4. Digital or Analog Voltmeter, through programmable key pad.
5. Frequency Jump: Furnish a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point
of resonance with the natural frequency of the machine.
6. Provide series line reactors for harmonic distortion control as standard
equipment.
7. Drive Speed Control, I/E or I/I or E/E or E/I transducers as needed.
8. Synchronous transfer to allow transfer from VFD to utility line and back to VFD
unit while motor is running.
9. Computer interface option through the addition of a RS 232 data card.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 8
10. Remote Digital/Analog Speed Meter with a 4-20 ma signal. Locate at central
control console.
11. Provide each VFD with the ability to be able to communicate with the building
automation system using BACNET MS/TP protocol.
12. 5% line reactor.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers of VFD equipment shall meet the
following requirements.
1. Suppliers of VFD Systems must be in the primary business of supplying Variable
Frequency Drives and have a minimum of five (5) years of service in that
business.
2. Vendor must have local service center with factory spare parts inventory and
factory authorized service technician on call 24 hours/day.
3. VFD units supplied in response to this specification shall be labeled by UL, CSA
or ETL. Note, the entire unit shall carry the label not just a component.
4. The following VFD suppliers are acceptable providing that all points of this
specification are adhered to:
a. ABB
b. Energy Management Corporation using Mitsubishi drives.
5. VFD vendors must have prior approval from Owner before quoting equipment
specified. If not listed above, vendor must apply to Owner for approval 10 days
prior to bid date showing point by point compliance with this specification
including sample of typical harmonic voltage distortion test report. In compliance
with general requirements of the specification.
F. Testing: Prior to shipping, test each unit and submit certified test report with each unit.
Standard tests to include:
1. Visual inspection, consisting of checking unit enclosure, wiring, connections,
fasteners, covers and locking mechanism.
2. High pot test; two (2)X rated voltage plus 1000 volts AC for 60 seconds shall be
applied per UL 508 on all perifial drive system power components (circuit
breakers, contactors, motor overloads, line reactors, disconnect switches, etc.)
as a complete package. A copy of test results shall be included in operation
manuals.
3. Motor run test.
4. Control panel devices, test all devices and lights.
5. Optional equipment, test optional equipment specified with VFD system.
6. Special tests, as required and specified.
G. Installation: Field mounting pad and power connections shall be provided by contractor.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513 - 9
1. Vendor shall supply field start-up service by an authorized factory service
representative consisting of system check-out, start-up and system run. The
vendor shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including operator
training. A written certificate of same shall be provided at start-up. Provide
written certified start-up report. VFD service technicians shall be full time
employees of the vendor or manufacturer, primarily engaged in VFD service work
during normal business hours but on call 24 hours. Start-up by sales
representative is not acceptable.
2. Startup/adjustment effort shall have at least two segments.
a. Prior to Test and Balance work to place equipment in operation.
b. At conclusion of Test and Balance work to adjust units to actual
operating conditions.
3. The following adjustments and tests shall be performed as a minimum with
certified copies included in the maintenance and operation manual.
a. Verify that the input voltage is within the manufacturer's specification
tolerances.
b. Verify that the motor rotation is correct in all modes of operation.
c. Verify all operator devices, programming and monitoring functions to be
fully operational.
d. Verify operation of all field signal control connections.
e. Measure and record system output voltage and current at 50% and
100% speed. Tune the output voltage to correspond to motor nameplate
rating at full speed. Check full load current measurements against
nameplate data.
f. Make all parameter adjustments to tune and optimize the VFD system to
the application. Record all configuration values as part of this report.
g. Conduct harmonic tests as identified in the specification. Measurements
shall be recorded for each unit with the VFD system off, running at 50%
speed, and running at full speed and load.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0519 - 1
SECTION 23 0519
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges section, and is part of each
Division 23 section making reference to thermometers and pressure gauges specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in
this and other Division-23 sections.
B. Meters and gauges specified in this section include the following:
1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings.
a. Digital Thermometers.
b. Thermometer Wells.
c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs.
2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings.
a. Pressure Gauges.
b. Pressure Gauge Valves.
c. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of thermometers and/or
pressure gauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Temperature and Pressure Gauge Types: Provide temperature and pressure gauges of same
type by same manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for
each type of thermometer and pressure gauge.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of valve,
indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of thermometer
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0519 - 2
and pressure gauge. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual;
in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 DIGITAL THERMOMETERS:
A. General: Provide digital thermometers, designed and constructed for use in service indicated
variable angle, light powered.
B. Case: High impact ABS.
C. Range: -40/300F.
D. Display: 3/8" LLD digits.
E. Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1F, whichever is greater.
F. Resolution: 1/10 between -19.9/199.9F.
G. Recalibration: Internal potentiometer.
H. Lux Rating: 10 lux.
I. Update: 10 seconds.
J. Ambient Operating: -30/110F.
K. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor.
L. Stem Assembly: Industrial Glass.
M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass thermometers of one of the
following:
1. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Weksler
3. Trerice
2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS:
A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to
match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut
with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.
2.3 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS:
A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200
degrees F (93 degrees C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with ½" NPS fitting,
with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe
assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain.
Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide temperature gauge connector
plugs of one of the following:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0519 - 3
1. Peterson Equipment Co.
2. SISCO
3. Universal
4. Flow Design
2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES: (Liquid Filled) (Non-Liquid Filled for Steam Applications)
A. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated,
designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Liquid filled.
B. Type: Liquid filled for use with temperature up to 200F.
C. Case and Ring: 4" type 304 stainless steel case with polished stainless steel bayonet
ring.
D. Dial: White aluminum with black markings.
E. Window: Clear acrylic.
F. Tube: Phosphor bronze.
G. Socket: Brass with restrictor.
H. Pointer: Black anodized aluminum, adjustable.
I. Movement: Stainless steel rotary type with bushings.
J. Accuracy: 1% of full scale.
K. Connection: 1/4" male NPT, Provide pressure snubber, for water service.
L. Range: Conform to the following; place operating pressure in mid-range.
1. Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 psi - 30 psi, as needed.
2. Water: 0 - 100 psi - 160 psi, as needed.
3. Steam 0 - 25 psi – 160 psi as needed.
M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauges of one
of the following:
1. U.S. Gauge
2. Marsh Instrument Co./Marshalltown
3. Trerice.
4. Weiss.
5. Weksler.
2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE VALVES:
A. General: Provide pressure gauge valves between pressure gauges and gauge tees on
piping systems. Construct gauge valve of brass bar stock with 1/4" female NPT on each
end, and knurled handle brass plug or use 1/4" ball valve or Crane 88 needle valve (for
steam).
B. Syphon: For steam, 1/4" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4" male NPT on
each end.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0519 - 4
C. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges.
2.6 AIRFLOW/TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT STATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ebtron Gold Series.
2. Paragon Controls OAFE-1550.
B. The airflow/temperature measurement station(s) indicated on the plans shall be capable
of monitoring airflow and temperature rates at each measurement location.
C. Sensors shall use thermal dispersion technology with two bead in glass", hermetically
sealed thermistor probes at each measurement point.
D. The system shall be factory tested prior to shipment and not require calibration or
adjustment over the life of the equipment when installed in accordance to manufacturer's
guidelines.
E. Each sensor probe shall be provided with a UL plenum-rated connecting cable with
circular terminal connectors and gold plated contacts. Connecting cable shall be a
minimum of 50 feet in length for each probe.
F. Sensor probes shall be "plug and play" design without having to be matched to a specific
transmitter. All sensor calibration data shall be stored in the sensor probe. No additional
devices or transducers shall be required to interface with the host controls.
G. Sensors shall be factory-calibrated at 16 airflow rates and 3 temperatures to NIST-
traceable standards for both airflow and temperature. Each sensing point shall
independently measure airflow and temperature prior to averaging.
H. Installed accuracy shall be percent of reading and demonstrated at both maximum and
minimum airflow rates for each measurement location.
I. Transmitter and Electronics Enclosure
1. The transmitter shall be microprocessor-based and capable of processing up to
16 independent sensing points per location.
2. All connectors and interconnects shall have gold plated contacts. The transmitter
shall operate on 24 VAC and be internally fused and protected. The transmitter
shall have a 16 character alphanumeric LCD display for airflow, temperature, and
system diagnostics. Analog output signals shall be field selectable (0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA).
3. All inputs and outputs shall be fused, protected, and internally isolated from the
24 VAC power supply. The transmitter shall have a digital adjustment for output
signal offset/gain and an adjustable digital filter for airflow output.
4. The transmitter shall be capable of displaying I.P. units. The transmitter shall
accept a user-defined area for CFM display. The transmitter shall be capable of
continuously performing sensor and transmitter diagnostics and perform a full
system check on power-up. A sensor detection system shall ignore any
malfunctioning sensors and set a visual alarm on the LCD display.
5. The transmitter shall be capable of indicating individual sensor airflow and
temperature readings on the LCD display. The enclosure shall be aluminum alloy
for indoor use and capable of operating over a temperature range of +30° F to
+120° F. The electronics shall be installed inside and protected from the weather.
J. Duct & Plenum Mounted Sensor Probes
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0519 - 5
1. Sensor probes shall be constructed of gold anodized aluminum alloy tube with
303 stainless steel mounting brackets. Probes shall be constructed as insertion,
internal, or standoff mounting, depending on the installation requirements.
K. Probe Performance Requirements
1. The sensor accuracy for airflow shall be at least +/- 2% of reading over the
sensor probe operating ranges.
2. the installed total accuracy for airflow shall be better than 3% of reading over the
sensor probe operating ranges when installed in accordance with manufacturers'
guidelines. The sensor accuracy for temperature shall be better than +/- 0.15 de.
F over the entire operating range.
L. Probe Sensor density
Area (Sq. ft.)Sensor
</= 1 2
1 to 4 4
4 to 8 6
8 to <12 8
12 to <16 12
>=16 16
3. EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES:
A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be
easily read by observer standing on floor.
B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
2. At outlet of each water heater at connection of new domestic hot water to existing
domestic hot water.
3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and built-up central
systems.
4. At inlet and outlet of each boiler.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill
well with oil or graphite, secure cap.
D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on
pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES:
A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge bar stock valve
located on pipe at most readable position.
B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC 23 0519 - 6
1. At suction and discharge of each pump, single gauge, mani-folded to include inlet
strainer.
2. Across of each pressure reducing valve.
3. At water service outlet at connection of domestic cold water.
4. At inlet and outlet of strainer.
C. Pressure Gauge Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber for water.
D. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe
at most readable position. Secure cap.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
VALVES 23 0523 - 1
SECTION 23 0523
VALVES
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Valves section, and is part of each Division 23 section making
reference to valves specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other
Division 23 sections.
B. Types of valves specified in section include the following:
1. Drain Valves.
2. Ball Valves.
3. Plug Valves.
4. Butterfly Valves.
5. Check Valves.
6. Swing Check.
7. Miscellaneous Valves.
C. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment
assembly in other Division 23 sections.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types and
sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.
C. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating
clearly marked on valve body.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for
each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit
valve schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each
required valve.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type (exploded view) shop drawings for each
type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
VALVES 23 0523 - 2
components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in
accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 "Standard Marking
System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions".
2. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged- or
welded-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10 "Face-to-Face and
End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves".
3. UL and FM Compliance: Provide valves used in fire protection piping, which are
UL-listed and FM approved.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end
connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where
more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than
quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 4" and smaller, other than plug
valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for
quarter-turn valves 6" and larger. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for
overhead valves 8'-0" and higher above finished floor.
D. Connections: Unless otherwise noted for a particular reason, any valve 2" and larger
shall have flanges. For grooved joint steel pipe in 6" and larger sizes, convert to flanged
pipe, use indicated ball or butterfly valves.
2.2 GLYCOL HEATING WATER AND GLYCOL CHILLED WATER:
A. Ball Valves:
1. Steel piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF, bronze construction,
threaded ends, bubble tight mineral filled PTFE seat at 250 psig under water,
hard, stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever
or tee handle as required. Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. Crane,
Keystone, Powell, Nibco/Scott, Milwaukee, Grinnell. All valves of the same type
shall be of the same manufacturer. No other manufacturers approved. All drain
valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
VALVES 23 0523 - 3
2. Copper piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF bronze construction,
threaded or solder ends, bubble tight mineral filled. PTFE seat at 250 psig under
water, hard stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction.
Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for tight shut-off. Watts B-6000-SS or
B-6001-SS, Apollo 70-100 or 70-200, Milwaukee BA-100S or BA-150S,
Hammond, Belimo. No other manufacturer approved. All drain valves shall be
furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection.
B. Butterfly Valves:
1. For piping 3" and larger. Install with weld neck flanges, Norris Series R-3011-
23SS-2B, double tapped lug, single-flange ductile iron or cast iron body, 316 SS
disc, stainless steel shaft with extended neck for insulated pipe, EPDM seat and
O-rings, indicating worm gear operator, 175 psig bubble tight pressure rating
(250 where required). Demco, Keystone, Rockwell, Grinnell, Bray, ABZ,
Hammond or Milwaukee.
C. Swing Check Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: Bronze, threaded, Y-pattern, 200# WOG at swing check valve.
Approved manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Nibco.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, 200# WOG swing check valve with bronze
trim. Approved manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Nibco.
D. Balancing Cocks:
1. 2" and Smaller: 175 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, screwed ends,
wrench operated, lubricated.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: 200 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, flanged ends,
wrench operated, lubricated.
E. Balancing Valves: Circuit balancing valve with venturi and pressure taps. Do not use
gate valves or butterfly valves as balancing valves. Provide schedule showing pressure
drop and flow rate of each valve. Flow Set Accusetter, Armstrong, Gerand, Griswold. If
improperly sized balance valves are found during the test and balance work, the
improperly sized balanced valves shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost
to the Owner or project.
2.3 DOMESTIC COLD WATER, DOMESTIC HOT WATER, AND DOMESTIC HOT WATER
RETURN (COPPER PIPE):
A. BALL VALVES:
1. Steel Pipe 2-1/2" and Smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250
oF, bronze construction,
threaded ends, hard, stainless steel ball. Operate with flow in either direction.
Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. Apollo 70-140 or 70-240. Milwaukee BA-
100S or BA-150S, Watts B-5000-SS or BA-6001-SS.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES:
A. AIR VENT VALVES: Stockham B-64, 300 psi working pressure, 3/8" bronze or Crane
No. 88, Watson McDonnel, Metraflex, Bell & Gossett.
B. WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES: For making up to heating systems, Watts
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
VALVES 23 0523 - 4
No. 223U, capacity as noted.
C. WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES: For relief for heating system, Bell and Gossett
No. 480, Watts, pressure setting as required.
D. GAUGE VALVES: Crane #88 bronze needle valve or Trerice barstock needle valve, or
ball valve.
E. REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: Complete with
isolation valve and strainer upstream and insulation valve downstream. Watts 009
Series.
3.INSTALLATION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION:
A. Locate all valves in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate maintenance.
B. Install valves with stems horizontal or above.
C. Provide chain operators for any valves located more than 8 feet above finished floor.
This means double acting lever handles for quarter turn valves, or chain wheels for multi-
turn valves. Arrange valves and set up chain length for proper operation.
D. All branch lines which supply a specific area of the building (such as a toilet room) shall
be valved near the main so that each area may be isolated from the system for repairs
without having to shut down both men and women's restrooms, other areas, or the whole
building.
E. Make all valves located above a non-lay-in type ceiling or behind a wall accessible by
means of an access door.
F. Valve should be installed with bonnets at least 45 degrees above the horizontal to ensure
debris does not collect in bonnet.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 1
SECTION 23 0529
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Supporting Devices section, and is part of each Division 23
section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified
in other Division 23 sections.
B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:
1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports.
2. Vertical-Piping Clamps.
3. Hanger-Rod Attachments.
4. Building Attachments and In-Beds.
5. Saddles and Shields.
6. Miscellaneous Materials.
7. Roof Equipment Supports.
8. Anchors.
9. Equipment Supports.
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
D. Relate this section to Section 23 05 48 regarding seismic and vibration control.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors,
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for
each type of support and anchor.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and
anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 2
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing codes
pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors.
2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved.
3. MSS Standard Compliance:
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture
comply with MSS SP-58.
b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.
c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.
d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal piping hangers and
supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by
Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.
Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit
around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers
and supports for copper-piping systems.
B. Adjustable Steel Clevises Hangers: MSS Type 1. (For suspension of non-insulated or insulated
stationary pipe lines; 1/2" to 30".)
C. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. (For suspension of pipe requiring up to 4" of
insulation and where flexibility of clamp is desirable; 3/4" to 24".)
D. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. (For suspension of cold pipe lines or hot lines where little or no
insulation is required; 1/2" to 24".)
E. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. (For suspension of piping when off-center closure allowing
installation of hanger before erection of piping is desired; 1/2" to 4".)
F. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe
lines; 3/4" to 8".)
G. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe
lines; 3/4" to 8".)
H. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe liens;
1/2" to 8".)
I. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 3
pipe lines; 3/8" to 8".)
J. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to
3".)
K. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe
lines; 3/8" to 3".)
L. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. (For support of heavy loads; 1/2" to 30".)
M. Clips: MSS Type 26. (For support of uninsulated piping not subject to expansion or contraction.)
N. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base- support and cast-iron floor
flange. (To support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor 4" to
36".)
O. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor
flange. (To Type 36 except U-bolt provided for retaining pipe.)
2.2 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping clamps
complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit
vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product
information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide
copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems.
B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. (For support and steadying of pipe risers; 3/4" to 20". Also
supports pipe covering or insulation.)
C. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. (When longer ends are required for riser clamps.)
2.3 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments
complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each
piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated
hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.
B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. (For adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads.)
C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. (For use on high temperature piping installations.)
D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. (For use with split pipe rings, MSS type 11.)
E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. (For attaching hanger rod to various types of building
attachments.)
2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS AND IN-BEDS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments
complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide
copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 4
B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. (For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from
concrete ceiling.)
C. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. (Use under roof installations with bar joist construction, for
attachment to top flange of structural shape.)
D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. (For attachment to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.)
E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. (For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams.)
F. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22. (For attachment to bottom of beams where loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.)
G. C-Clamps: MS Type 23. (For attachment to structural shapes.)
H. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. (For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required
tangent to edge of flange.)
I. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. (For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.)
J. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.)
K. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.)
L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. (For attachment to structural steel.)
M. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:
1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, to 570 pounds.
2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, to 1,500 pounds.
3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, to 3,000 pounds.
N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. (For use on sides of steel or wooden beams.)
O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. (For attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is
desired.)
P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. (For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movements where head room is limited.
Q. Refer to drawings for Unistrut inserts.
2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and
supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to
mate with pipe insulation.
B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; see section Mechanical Insulation for void fill
requirements. Use for roller supports and on all pipes 10" and larger.
C. Protection Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation.
D. Thermal Hanger Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 5
E. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of
one of the following:
1. Elcen Metal Products Co.
2. Pipe Shields, Inc.
2.6 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of
one of the following:
1. Kin-Line, Inc.
2. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International
3. ITT Grinnel Corp.
4. B-Line
5. Unistrut
2.7 HIGH HUMIDITY AREAS: Use cadmium plated or galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts,
bolts and other accessories in boiler rooms or other high humidity areas.
2.8 OUTSIDE AREAS: Use galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories for
all outside areas.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.
C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
Use Embeco grout for non-shrink applications.
D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from factory built channel (Unistrut) system and use
factory fasteners for channel steel shapes, selected for loads required; weld steel in
accordance with AWS standards.
E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider
bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder.
Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to Installer.
3.2 PREPARATION:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 6
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachments.
B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet
at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and
testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with
work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and
procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS:
A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for
proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in
MSS SP-69. Install additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts
before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms.
1. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install
reinforcing bars through the openings at the tops of inserts.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to rigidly support piping properly
from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install
supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes
is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to
support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other
accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and
supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper
plated, or by isolating with foam rubber covering or 30 mil insulating tape.
D. Provisions for Movement:
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
2. Install supports within 2 feet of non-vertical flex connectors.
E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.
G. Insulated Piping: Do not allow hangers to come in contact with pipe where pipe is specified to be
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529- 7
insulated.
H. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through
insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.
I. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled
water piping, install galvanized steel protective shields. Install calcium silicate blocks (12" long
minimum) at support points.
J. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS:
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31,
and to prevent transfer for loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit
manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums
recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at
intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of
anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
A. Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor mounted equipment furnished as part of the work
of Division 15. Size bases to extend a minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4"
above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for
bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment
manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners.
B. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure.
Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank
saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.
C. Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 7; not work of
this section.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level
and elevations.
C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 1
SECTION 23 0548
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
1.GENERAL:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control section, and is part
of each Division 23 section making reference to mechanical sound, vibration and seismic control
specified herein.
C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete seismic restraint and vibration control systems for all work
installed under Division 23. Including owner furnished contractor installed equipment. Work to be
responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective
seismic design Category B, importance factor of 1.5.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent seismic and vibration
control subcontractor who has the technology, experience, computer capabilities and
manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special devices
to meet the minimum requirements described herein. Select from the following:
1. Amber Booth
2. Kinetics
3. Mason - West
4. Vibro-Acoustics
B. The seismic and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a
minimum of two specific periods.
1. When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for the
purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved
devices.
2. At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of
verifying the correctness of the seismic restraint and vibration isolation device installation
and preparing certification of the seismic vibration-isolation work.
C. The seismic subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include, but not
be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division 23) Contractor concerning:
1. Anchoring of all mechanical equipment including owner furnished and contractor
installed.
2. Vibration mounting of equipment.
3. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 2
4. Snubbing of equipment.
5. Bracing and anchoring of ductwork piping and conduit.
6. Provision for expansion and vibration of piping.
7. Concrete and/or steel pads or bases to assure proper mounting of restraints and
isolators.
8. Vibration isolation of exhaust fans, relief fans, ventilation fans, and supply air fans.
D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of steel
sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete.
E. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all
isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning properly.
Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection,
equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint
locations and type of restraints.
B. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard
connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations, thermal
expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork, piping and
conduit.
C. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork are
proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints.
D. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis for
selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed.
E. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for
restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in one of the United
States.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards: (Latest adopted edition)
1. International Building Code
2. NFPA bulletin 90A,
3. UL Standard 181
4. Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems.
Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing
and Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 3
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist seismic forces in all
directions.
A. Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a
resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraints shall
allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in normal starting or stopping
operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during system
operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to 1/4" clearance both
horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured under a Quality
Assurance (QA) Program.
B. Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used where
equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for snubbers. Isolation
portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening device.
Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to structure. The spring assembly shall be
removable and shall fit within a welded steel enclosure.
C. Piping, Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be
standard fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members.
1. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be
used only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDELINE:
A. Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the
basis for restraint methods. (Exception - no cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except
as noted.)
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT-PIPING AND CONDUIT:
A. General: All piping and conduit shall be protected in all planes by restraints, designed to
accommodate thermal movement while at the same time restraining seismic motion. Tanks and
vessels connected to piping shall be restrained in the same manner as the piping.
B. Locations of the restraints shall include, but not be limited to:
1. At all drops or risers to equipment connections.
2. At all changes in direction of piping and conduit.
3. At all horizontal runs of pipe and conduit to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging with
restraints not to exceed the following:
a. Transverse bracing at 40'-0" O.C. maximum.
b. Longitudinal bracing at 80'-0" O.C. maximum.
4. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion
joints.
5. On both sides of flexible connectors.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 4
C. Exceptions:
1. Conduit under 2-1/2" size and piping under 1-1/2" size need not be additionally
seismically restrained except as follows:
a. Brace all piping and conduit 1-1/4" and larger in boiler rooms, mechanical
rooms, electrical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms.
b. Brace all fuel gas and oil piping, medical gas piping and compressed air
piping 1" and larger.
2. Seismic bracing may be omitted:
a. When the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting
structure member and the pipe or conduit is suspended by an individual
hanger.
b. On all piping 3/4" and smaller.
3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT INSULATED PIPING: Where piping is designated to be insulated, the points
of support shall be protected by a 360o sheet metal shield. Insert insulation shall be of the same
thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. (Pipe Shields, Inc.)
The sheet metal shield wrapped around the insert shall be of the following lengths and gauge
thickness.
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2 - 1-1/2" 4" 20
2 - 6" 6" 20
8 - 10" 9" 16
12 - 18" 12" 16
20 and up 18" 16
3.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - PIPING AT FIRE-WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION WHERE WALL IS
USED AS A RESTRAINT:
A. Bare Pipe: Encase pipe in minimum 24 gauge sheet metal can sized for one inch spacing
between pipe and outer diameter of can. Spacing shall be packed in accordance with fire
resistant/retardant materials in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING.
B. Insulated Pipe: Encase in adjustable or fixed length cans, minimum 24 gauge, sized for
maximum one inch spacing between insulation and outer diameter of can. Insulation shall
consist of 360o insert sized to extend a minimum of 1" beyond wall or floor penetration and of
the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Spacing between shield and can shall be
packed in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING.
3.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GROOVED PIPING:
A. Where grooved piping is selected as the piping system, it must be seismically restrained as
well as provide for thermal movement.
B. Pipes may not be fastened to differently moving structures such as a wall or a ceiling, or a
ceiling and a floor. The intent is to have the piping system move with the structure and not
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 5
separate from it.
C. In general, grooved piping shall be provided with additional flexible couplings to allow
extreme deflections to occur, yet restrained to prevent movement beyond the limits of the
flexible connections. Linear movement shall be incorporated as a part of the flexible
connections or in a swing joint arrangement.
D. Groove piping systems shall be separated, analyzed and submitted from threaded or welded
piping systems.
3.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - DUCTWORK:
A. Ductwork, four feet square and larger in cross sectional area or 26" diameter and larger shall
be protected in all places by restraints. Locations shall include, but not be limited to:
1. At all equipment connections.
2. At all duct turns and duct run ends (transverse bracing).
3. Transverse bracing to occur 30'-0" O.C. maximum. Rectangular ducts 61" and larger
in either direction may be braced at 32'-0" O.C.
4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0" O.C. maximum.
B. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with
maximum weight for selection of restraint members.
C. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from supporting member
and attached at the top of the duct as well as sides and bottom.
3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION:
A. General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. Review
isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with project criteria.
B. Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately 1/10
that of the related driving frequency.
C. Equipment to Include:
1. Exhaust Air Fans: Vibration isolated and seismic restrained on inertia base. Inertia
base shall have 1.5 times total weight of assembly.
2. Suspended inline ventilation fans.
3. Propeller relief air fans and ventilation fans.
4. Utility exhaust fans.
D. Field Verify: All required devices and installation.
3.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION - DUCTWORK AND PIPING:
A. Furnish and install devices to isolate all piping and ductwork from other moving equipment.
Provide flex connections, spring hangers, grooved joint couplings for pipe, etc., as required.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548 - 6
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES 23 0553 - 1
SECTION 23 0553
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Label all plumbing, heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding
thermostats and relays), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and starters
for all mechanical equipment. Label all fire dampers, fire smoke dampers, smoke damper access
doors.
2. GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 EQUIPMENT, PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION:
A. Equipment:
1. Use the same identification number and name as that shown on the drawings or in these
specifications. Make equipment nameplates of black face formica with white engraved
lettering 3/16" high or larger, attached securely.
2. Include the following information on equipment nameplates where applicable:
Identification name.
Identification number.
Capacity specified.
Actual capacity.
Area or zone served.
Note operating conditions, including head or static pressure, RPM, motor horsepower at
design conditions, area or zone served, name of lubricant, frequency of lubrication.
B. Valve Identification:
1. For all valves, regardless of size, provide brass tags at least 1-1/4" by 3" in size and
0.051 inches thick. Use engraved lettering at least 1/8" high. Identify each valve on the
drawing separately, and with valve tags matching the drawing identification.
2. Provide valve tags which include the following minimum information:
a. Normal Position
b. Duty
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES 23 0553 - 2
3. Identify tag numbers as follows:
Valve Tags Duty
1-99 HRW
100 SCHW
200 CW
300 DWC & DWH
400 FIRE
500 AIR
600 DEM W
700 GLYCOL
800 STEAM
900 CONDENSATE
4. Make a schedule of all tagged valves, include in O & M Manuals.
5. Connect valve tags to valve stems with brass chain.
C. Color code all accessible duct and piping and identify with wording and arrows every 50 feet, at
each riser, at each junction, at each access door, and where required to easily identify the
medium transported.
D. Identify duct and piping systems by:
1. Lettering color, and
2. Flow Direction Arrow.
3. Identifying lettering shall be painted or stenciled on duct or pipe. Self-adhesive or glue-on
type labels are acceptable. Letters shall be 2" high for duct and for 3" or larger piping, 1"
high for 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" pipe, and 1/2" high for 1" pipe and smaller.
4. Arrows to indicate direction of flow shall be painted or stenciled on the duct or pipe in the
same color as the lettering. The arrow shall point away from the lettering. On duct and
3" or larger piping, the “shaft” of the arrow shall be 2" long and 1" wide. Smaller piping,
2-1/2" or less, shall have arrows with a shaft 1/2" wide and 2" long. Use a double-headed
arrow if the flow can be in either direction.
5. Lettering, directional flow arrows and banding colors shall be painted or stenciled on the
duct or pipe. Self-adhesive or glue on labels are acceptable.
6. Piping and duct shall be identified with the following colors:
Medium in Banding Identifying Lettering
Pipe or Duct Color Lettering Color
Water:
Glycol Chilled Water One Blue Glcyol Chilled Water CHWS Black
Supply Supply
Glycol Chilled Water Two Blue Glycol Chilled Water CHWR Black
Return Return
Glycol Heating One Yellow Glycol Heating BHWS Black
Water Supply Two Orange Water Supply
Glycol Heating One Yellow Glycol Heating BHWR Black
Water Return One Orange Water Return
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES 23 0553 - 3
High Pressure Steam High Pressure Steam HPS Black
High Pressure Cond. High Pressure Cond. HPC Black
Med. Pressure Steam Med. Pressure Steam MPS Black
Med. Pressure Cond. Med. Pressure Cond. MPL Black
Low Pressure Steam Low Pressure Steam LPS Black
Low Pressure Cond. Low Pressure Cond. LPC Black
Cold Air Duct Cold Air Duct (Unit Served)
Return Air Duct Return Air Duct (Unit Served)
Exhaust Air Duct Exhaust Air Duct (Unit Served)
Supply Duct Supply Duct (UnitServed)
Fire, Smoke, Fire/Smoke Damper Fire, Smoke, Access Doors
Fire/Smoke Damper AD – Red
2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION:
A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face formica with white engraved
lettering labels.
B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face formica labels with white
engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device.
C. Numerically or alphabetically, code all panel wiring and tubing.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 1
SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
7. Provide new sheaves and change them as required on all fans.
8. Participate fully in commissioning activities as specified in division 019113.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air
velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a
person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance
tested.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 2
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
P. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 90 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this
Section.
B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 120 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures
as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended
for use on this Project.
C. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent.
D. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.
E. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC
or NEBB. Balancing may only be performed by the following:
1. Barnett, Inc., Payson Utah
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's
representatives and other members of the Commissioning team on approval of the testing,
adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the
details. Ensure the participation of all proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing team members,
HVAC controls installer, and other support personnel. Provide 14 days' advance notice of
scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include, at a minimum, the following:
a. Contract Documents examination report.
b. Review of the Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Plan, and proposed TAB forms.
c. Proposed work schedule and Project site access requirements.
d. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors, especially the
Controls Contractor.
e. Coordination with the Commissioning Authority and the Commissioning team.
f. Coordination and distribution of a “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions” log.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 3
g. Coordination of other documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" or from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required
Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if
required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing
operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and/or other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY (Not Applicable)
2.PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
3.EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 4
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system
and equipment operation.
B. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been
performed.
C. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible
and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
E. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
F. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they
are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
G. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
H. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
I. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid
flows.
J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
K. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare the system readiness reports found in section
3.23. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 5
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC or NEBB national standards and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing,
close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore
vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and
devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-
air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems.
Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-duct, induction-unit
supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified
in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 6
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design to achieve design conditions. Make
required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows
within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of
design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers
at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 7
3.6 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the fan
design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow
condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the
reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. Record
which airflow terminals were chosen for this purpose.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted,
adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position
that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure
for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow and verify operation of the
static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 8
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at
minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly
among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at
maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
3.7 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at the end of
system and moving towards the pumps. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved
pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.8 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with
the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential
across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.
Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump
has the intended impeller size.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 9
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge
valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. By-pass valves shall be set to equal the pressure drop of the coil, settings recorded and
balancing device marked.
G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.
H. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
3.9 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow
through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.
3.10 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
3.11 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-control
valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.
E. Record safety valve settings.
F. Verify operation of steam traps.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 10
3.12 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation.
Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and
nameplate data.
C. Report any starter thermal-protection sizing issues in the TAB issues log.
3.13 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for more
than 5000 cfm.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Reheat and Fan Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering water temperature.
2. Entering air temperature.
3. Leaving air temperature.
4. Air Flow
3.14 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation
within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-
hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings.
Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.15 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control
functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 11
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a
grounded or nongrounded power supply.
J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: + 5 to +10%
2. Positive Pressure Spaces:
a. Supply Air 0 to +10%
b. Exhaust Air 0 to -10%
c. Negative Pressure Spaces:
d. Supply Air 0 to -10%
e. Exhaust Air 0 to +10%
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -10%
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -5%
3.17 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified
in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare weekly reports (hand-written is acceptable) to
describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a
copy of the “TAB Issues and Issue Resolution” log of any deficiencies and problems found in
systems being tested and balanced.
3.18 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
C. Include the National Project Performance Guarantee issued by AABC or NEBB.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 12
D. Include a detailed narrative describing any discrepancies between the design requirements and
the “as balanced” conditions that exceed the allowable tolerances described in 3.19 above. Also,
list the steps taken and test preformed (with supporting data) attempting to rectify the condition.
E. Include the final “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions” log.
F. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
G. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e. VFD settings for variable-air-volume systems.
f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
g. Door positions for the BSL-3 and Vivarium areas and suites.
h. Fume hood sash height settings
i. Status of the Kitchen Hood and its Make-up VAV
j. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
H. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 13
I. Equipment Test Reports: For all equipment tested:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: (all elements of the system
that were tested, including air and water flows, static pressures, pump hoods, inlet and
outlet static pressures, inlet, outlet pressure type of coils, rows, circuits face areas, inlet,
outlet wet bulb, dry bulb temperatures, duct sizes tested, inlet and outlet flows
temperatures and pressures and all other pertinent data. The report to be organized per
each item tested.)
a. Total rate in cfm, gpm and lbs/hr.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Motor amps, volts, kW
e. VFD setpoints
f. Starter and Thermal Overload information
g. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
h. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
j. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
k. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
l. Outside airflow in cfm.
m. Return airflow in cfm.
n. Outside-air damper position.
o. Return-air damper position.
p. Pitot-tube traverses.
q. Pump suction, discharge, differential pressure, dead-head, and total flow.
r. Summary of all final room pressure relationships by CFM offsets and inches of
WG.
s. List of all TAB generated or manipulated final setpoints for the Phoenix control
valves and VAV boxes. (area factors, correction factors, flow coefficients, etc…)
J. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 14
3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 120 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct
unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
C. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected
measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic
purposes.
D. The TAB Final Report Verification shall be conducted by the CxA (and possibly other members of
the Cx Team) and will include a field verification of up to 10% of the PTB’s field readings.
E. The Test and Balance contractor will provide technicians and instrumentation to support the field
verification.
F. Instruments used for the field verification shall be the same instruments (by model and serial
number) that were used for the original TAB work.
G. Failure of an item during the TAB field verification is defined as:
1. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent from the reported
value.
2. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 decibels. (Note: variations in background
noise must be considered).
H. A failure of more than 10 percent of the readings tested during the field verification shall result in
the rejection of the final TAB report and require re-balancing of the system(s) in question.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 1
SECTION 23 0700
MECHANICAL INSULATION
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23, Section 23 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements applies to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules
as required by the current International Energy Code, and by requirements of this section. Use
no asbestos in this work. Include restorations of insulations of damaged work including repair of
damaged existing insulation due to new work.
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:
1. Piping Systems Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Flexible Unicellular
2. Ductwork System Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Rigid Flexible Wrap.
3. Equipment Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Cellular.
c. Flexible Unicellular.
C. Refer to Division 23 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection shields,
and thermal hanger shields.
D. Refer to Division 23 section "Ductwork" for duct linings.
E. Refer to Division 23 section "System Identification" for installation of identification devices for
piping, ductwork, and equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation
products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 years.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects
with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 2
C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings,
sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of
mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value,
thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of
mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical insulation materials
of one of the following (except as noted):
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div.
3. CertainTeed Corp.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
5. Manville Products Corp.
6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
8. Rubatex Corp.
9. Thermacell
2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS:
A. PREFORMED FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 547. (Class 1 for use to 450oF
(230oC); Class 2 for use to 650oF (345oC); Class 3 for use to 1200oF (650oC).
B. CELLULAR GLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 552. (Type I - flat block; Type II - pipe and
tubing insulation, Class 1 - regular (uncovered), Class 2 - jacketed; Type III - special shapes;
Type IV roof board.
C. JACKETS FOR PIPING INSULATION: All purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, ASTM C 921,
Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above
ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option.
D. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per
manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Encase exterior fittings insulation and piping with aluminum jacket with weather-proof
construction.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 3
F. Encase suction diffusers in a removable/replaceable insulating box.
G. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
H. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
I. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; complying with the following table.
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2” to 1-1/2” 4” 20 ga.
2” to 6” 6” 20 ga.
8” to 10 9” 16 ga
12” to 18” 12” 16 ga.
J. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degrees insert of high density, 100 psi, water-
proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same
thickness as adjoining insulation.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields
of one of the following:
a. Elcen Metal Products Co.
b. Pipe Shields, Inc.
2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS:
A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1. Class 1 - 400
oF (204oC); Class 2 -
400oF (204oC); Class 3 - 850oF (454oC); Class 4 - 1000oF (538oC); Class 5 - 1800oF (982oC);
Class 1 - 10 lbs/ft3; Class 2, 3 and 4 - 12 lbs/ft3; class 5 - 20 lbs/ft3.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4. Type 1 - resilient,
flexible; Class B-1 - 0.65 lbs/ft3; Class B-2 - 0.75 lbs/ft3; Class B-3 - 1.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-4 - 1.5
lbs/ft3; Class B-5 - 2.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-6 - 3.0 lbs/ft3; Type II - flexible; Class F-1 - 4.5 lbs/ft3; Type
III - semirigid; Class F-2 - 4.5 lbs/ft3.
C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below
ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient.
D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles
and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective
finishes ad similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS:
A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 2 to 400
oF, Class 3 to 850oF, Class 4
to 1000oF. (Class 1 - 400oF (204oC); Class 2 - 400oF (240oC); Class 3 - 850oF (454oC); Class 4 -
1000oF (538oC); Class 5 - 1800oF (982oC); Class 1 - 10 lbs/ft3; Class 2, 3 and 4 - 12 lbs/ft3; Class
5 - 20 lbs/ft3.)
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 4
B. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, B-4. (Type 1 - resilient flexible; Class B-
1 - 0.65 lbs/ft3; Class B-2 - 0.75 lbs/ft3; Class B-3 - 01.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-4 - 1.5 lbs/ft3; Class B-5 -
2.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-6 - 3.0 lbs/ft3; Type II - flexible; Class F-1 - 4.5 lbs/ft3; Type III - semirigid;
Class f-2 - 4.5 lbs/ft3.)
C. Flexible Unicellular Sheet Insulation: ASTM C 534. (Type I - tubular; Type II - sheet. For use
between -40oF (-40oC) and 200oF (93oC) only.)
D. Jackets Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketing material, not
less than 8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, except as otherwise
indicated.
E. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective
finishes as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
F. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles,
anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
2.5 PIPING SEALANT THROUGH WALLS: See also Section Mechanical Firestopping.
A. Sealant shall be a two-part foamed silicone elastomer equal to Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV
foam or equivalent by 3M or “Spec Seal” by STI. Sealant shall be applied at any piping of pipe or
duct penetration through fire or smoke walls to prevent air from passing through the opening.
B. Sealant cell structure, foamed in place, shall be U.L. classified and shall meet the smoke
development and fuel contribution ratings specified. Sealant shall be stable at extreme
temperatures, and shall effectively confine such hazards as fire, smoke and gases.
C. Sealant required at any fire/smoke wall penetration to be according to approved detail for each
specific wall assembly. Contractor shall submit detail for engineer approval.
2.6 PIPE JACKETING:
A. Provide and install jacketing for all insulated pipe exposed in mechanical rooms, fan rooms and
piping locationed outdoor. This in addition to standard foil on Kraft jacketing (ASJ). PVC
jacketing is not allowed on outdoor piping systems.
1. Steam and Condensate Piping and Glycol Chilled Water Piping (located outdoors.)
Embossed aluminum - 0.024 thickness.
Preformed aluminum fitting covers.
Banded, lockseam joints, pop-rivet seals.
2. Steam and Condensate Piping (inside)
Embossed aluminum - 0.024 thickness.
Preformed aluminum fitting covers.
Banded, lockseam joints, pop-rivet seals.
3. Domestic water, heating water, chilled water, other insulated piping.
PVC sheets, 0.030" thickness.
PVC formed fitting covers.
Solvent welded joints and seams.
(Provide for removal and expansion.)
B. Color of jacketing selected by Owner.
2.7 COATING OF CHILLED WATER PIPING: After fabrication assembly and installation of blacksteel chilled
water piping (copper and galvanized steel excluded), scrape and brush piping free of scale, dirt and loose
material, and wipe clean with solvent moistened cloth.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 5
A. Using brush or roller coat entire piping surfaces with prime and finish coats of a water based vinyl
acrylic system equivalent to the RustOleum “RustOCrylic” 5700 system or equivalent by
SherwinWilliams. System includes red primer (5769) grey primer (5781) and black finish coat
(5779). Seek a final film thickness in the 4-6 mil range.
B. Allow coating to dry and harden thoroughly before applying insulations.
2.8 FIRE/SMOKE ENCASEMENT:
A. Any and all non plenum rated PVC, and any other plastic piping located in return air and supply
air plenums shall be encased in a flame and smoke rated system. The encasement shall be
equal to Firemaster “Plastic Pipe Fire Protection System.” Install per manufacturer’s
requirements. The enclosure shall meet all codes.
B. Wrap all kitchen exhaust duct to create a 2 hr rating using a flame and smoke rated system. The
wrap shall be continuous from top of each kitchen hood to bottom of each rooftop kitchen exhaust
fan. The wrap shall be equal to FireMaster “FastWrap”. Install per manufacturer’s requirements.
The enclosure shall meet all codes.
C. Cover the bottom of each chase around return air fire damper supply duct and piping with a flame
and smoke rated system to create a 1 hour continuous shaft barrier. The cover shall be equal to
FireMaster “PlenumWrap”. Install per manufacturer’s requirements. The enclosure shall meet all
codes.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Piping insulation shall be fiberglass one-piece preformed pipe insulation, class related to
temperature, with all purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, additional jacketing as noted.
B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and covered with Zeston covers.
C. All cold water, chilled water, roof drains or any other lines upon which condensate moisture could
form, shall have a vapor-proof jacket.
D. Fire and smoke hazard for a complete insulation system shall not exceed:
1. Flame spread - 25
2. Fuel contribution - 50
3. Smoke development - 50
E. Hangers shall not contact pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated.
3.2 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
3.3 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for handicapped
fixtures), air chambers, unions strainers check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines
from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, fire protection piping, and
pre-insulated equipment.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 6
B. Cold Piping:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:
a. Potable cold water piping, chilled domestic water supply and return.
b. Interior above-ground storm water piping, including roof drain, deck drain and
landscape drain piping.
c. Plumbing vents within 6 lineal feet of roof or wall outlet.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass with all service jacket, self sealing lap:
b. 1" thickness, taped and sealed joints.
C. Hot Piping:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:
a. Potable hot water piping.
b. Potable hot water recirculating piping.
c. Hot drain piping (where indicated).
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass with all service jacket, self-sealing lap: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to
and including 1-1/2", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2".
b. Flexible Unicellular: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2" (underground
only, largest size permitted).
3.4 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets; on
cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping
beyond control valve, located within heated space; on condensate piping between steam trap and
union; and on unions, flanges strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
B. Cold Piping 40
OF (4.4OC) to Ambient:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:
a. HVAC make-up water piping.
b. All HVAC chilled water piping.
c. Heat recovery water piping.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe
sizes over 1-1/2".
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 7
C. Hot Pressure Piping (to 250°F):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems
(steam piping up to 100 psi, water piping up to 200 degrees F).
a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping, valves and fittings.
b. Low pressure steam and condensate piping.
c. Medium pressure steam and condensate piping, valves and fittings.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe
sizes over 1-1/2".
D. STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEM:
1. Fiberglass:
a. 2-1/2" thick insulation for high pressure steam pipe sizes up to and including 2",
3" thick insulation for high pressure steam pipe sizes from 2-1/2" through 4". 4"
thick insulation for high pressure steam pipe sizes from 6" through 8".
b. 2" thick insulation for medium pressure steam pipe sizes up to and including 1",
2-1/2" thick insulation for medium pressure steam pipe sizes from 1-1/4" through
4". 3" thick insulation for medium pressure steam pipe sizes from 6" through 8".
c. 1-1/2" thick insulation for low pressure steam pipe sizes up to and including 1-
1/2", 3" thick insulation for low pressure steam pipe sizes 2” and larger.
d. 1" thick insulation for condensate pipe sizes up to and including 1", 1-1/2" thick
insulation for condensate pipe sizes from 1-1/4" to 2", 2" thick insulation for
condensate pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger.
E. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing
outdoor protective finish or jacketing. Use only impermeable insulations (foam glass). Cover with
aluminum jacketing 0.02" minimum thickness.
3.5 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION:
A. Insulation Not Required: Do not insulate lined ductwork.
B. Hot, Cold and Dual Temperature Ductwork:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork:
a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit
inlet.
b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and
room terminal outlet.
(1) Insulate neck and bells of supply diffusers.
c. HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC
unit inlet.
(1) Except omit insulation on return ductwork located in return air ceiling
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 8
plenums.
d. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.
e. HVAC relief air plenums and ductwork.
2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and
thicknesses of insulation:
a. Rigid fiberglass: Class 1, 1-1/2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in machine, fan
and equipment rooms.
b. Flexible Fiberglass: Type 1, Class B-4, 1-1/2” lb/ft
3 density, 1-1/2" thick,
application limited to concealed locations.
C. High and Medium Velocity Duct: Insulate externally with type 1, class B-4 (1-1/2 lb/ft
3 density) 1-
1/2" thick fiberglass faced duct wrap with factory applied foil scrim Kraft facing U.L. 723 label.
D. Duct Insulations:
1. Wrap insulation snugly on the ductwork such that maximum thickness is maintained.
Butt all circumferential joints and overlap longitudinal joints a minimum of 2". Adhere
insulation with 4" strips of Insulation Bonding Adhesive, at 8" on center.
2. On circumferential joints, staple the 2" flange of the facing with 9/16" flare-door staples on
6" centers and taped with minimum 3" wide foil reinforcing Kraft tape. Tape all pin
penetrations or punctures in the facing.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION:
A. Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment:
2. Roof drain bodies.
3. Factory insulated surfaces do not need to be field insulated.
4. Chilled water pump suction diffuser.
B. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses
of insulation:
1. Fiberglass: 2" thick for surfaces above 35
oF (2oC) and 3" thick for surfaces 35oF (2oC)
and lower.
2. Cellular Glass: 3" thick for surfaces above 35
oF (2oC) and 4-1/2" thick for surfaces 35oF
(2oC) and lower.
3. Flexible Unicellular: 1" thick for cold and chilled surfaces.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION:
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions,
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended
purpose.
B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing and
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 9
acceptance of tests.
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping
with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut
pieces or scraps abutting each other.
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or
other damage.
F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and
composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.
G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations,
except where otherwise indicated.
H. Provide neatly beveled edge at all terminations and interruptions of insulation.
I. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor
barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap
cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.
J. Saddles and Shields:
1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide protection saddles or thermal hanger
shields with protection shields under all piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated,
for all insulated piping. Size saddles and thermal shields for exact fit to mate with pipe
insulation.
2. Protection Saddles: See section Supports and Anchors for saddle. Fill interior voids with
segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation.
3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing of insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/4" and smaller. Use with thermal hanger shields
for pipes 1-1/2" and larger.
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2” TO 1-1/2”4”20 ga.
2” to 6”6”20 ga.
8” to 10”9”16 ga.
12” to 18”12”16 ga.
4. Thermal Hanger Shields: High density calcium silicate encased in 360 degrees sheet
metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Use on pipes
1-1/2" to 8".
3.8 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION:
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended
purpose.
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 10
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and
other damage.
E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal
insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed.
G. Ductwork Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor
protective finish or jacketing as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed
finished spaces before covering with jacketing.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION:
A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves
intended purpose.
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo
poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive
voids resulting from poor workmanship.
C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and
other damage.
D. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction,
where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.
E. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving
smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and
cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface
irregularities.
F. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at
least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.
G. Do not insulate over handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate.
Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.
H. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened
periodically for maintenance: including metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and
accessories.
3.10 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR:
A. Repair damaged sections of mechanical insulation damaged during this construction period. Use
insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over
existing.
3.11 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700 - 11
A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor
barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work
during construction period to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 1
SECTION 23 0900
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of these control related sections.
1. See following sections for types of Control Systems included as a part of this
section.
a. Section 23 09 23 - Direct Digital Control Systems
b. Section 23 09 33 - Electric Control Systems
c. Control sequences are specified in this section under: "Sequence of
Operation".
B. Related Work:
1. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve
bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems. Not work of this Section.
2. Coordinate with all Division 23 vendors of mechanical equipment, i.e., Glycol
Makeup Units, Chillers, etc., which are responsible for furnishing related control
sensors and switches which are to be installed in the field by the Mechanical
Controls Contractor.
3. Coordinate with Division 26 for fire alarm connections on VFD’s, etc.
C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or
unit control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required electrical
devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by
manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between
equipment and field-installed control devices.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements
of Division 26 sections:
1. Control wiring between field-installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and
unit control panels.
2. 120 volt service required by control systems.
3. Control Wiring:
a. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may
be installed without conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 2
Article 725 Plenum Cable. Install the cable parallel to building walls.
b. In all other building areas, i.e., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms,
above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control wiring shall be
installed in conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall be
square with the walls of the buildings.
c. Number and code all wiring.
d. Use no wire smaller than 16 gauge, no conduit smaller than 1/2".
E. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing".
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of
electric control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. This project shall be base bid
using Johnson Controls control components with an alternate price by Yamas, Controls,
Inc.
B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and experienced in
electric control system installations for not less than 5 years. Installing by Johnson
Controls or Yamas Controls. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing, design, and
programming of specified and required control components, materials and systems.
Approved contractor Johnson Controls or Yamas Controls.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device
furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical
characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following
information:
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves,
and control devices, etc.
2. System architecture/communications diagram showing each system controller
and interrelated Bacnet MS/TP or Lon Works bus connections to match existing
control system in place..
3. Control valve and damper schedules.
4. Floor Plans with control device/enclosure locations.
5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
6. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of
work that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Note contract
responsibility to provide complete system regardless of delegation. Completely
interface with and show existing installation in the existing building.
7. Provide control panel wiring diagrams.
8. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and
labeling.
9. Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct
function of proposed sequences.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 3
C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of proposed thermostat cover.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this
data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with
requirements of Section 230100.
1.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION:
A. After a successful acceptance demonstration, the Controls Contractor shall submit as-
built drawings of the completed mechanical controls for the project to be incorporated into
the overall mechanical as-built drawings for final approval. After receiving final approval,
supply "6" complete 11x17 as-built drawing sets, together with AutoCad diskettes to the
Owner.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Submit two copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters,
controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and
any miscellaneous components used in the system.
2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of
the system.
3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points
and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable.
4. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform
programming functions.
5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used
and all routines used by the system.
6. Flow charts of the control software programs utilized in the DDC system.
7. Flow charts of the custom software programs utilized in the DDC system as
approved.
8. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs.
9. A copy of the warranty.
10. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions.
11. Recommended spare parts list.
1.7 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed
and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards.
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components
and devices for electric control systems.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control
sequences.
4. Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 4
equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as
required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store
equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
1.9 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (See Section 23 0000)
A. Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner,
leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the
systems.
B. Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show
proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique.
C. Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for reference.
Submit to Architect along with a proposed schedule of instruction. Schedule to allow
individual time for each trade and each system.
D. Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers to include qualified contractor
personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment. Go from the
classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts discussed.
1.10 WARRANTIES:
A. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each
piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial
use (substantial completion).
B. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these
systems.
1.11 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: All instruments, control panel and control piping shall be
thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished equipment.
1.12 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM:
A. During the system commissioning, testing and balancing of the various building systems,
have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and adjust controls as
needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of each function and control
point.
B. At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend one
working day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system operation,
and one working day checking each system for day-night and manual override with the
Owner's operating personnel on each air system. A complete operating booklet shall be
provided and used during the training period. Schedule this training with the Owner and
Mechanical Contractor.
1. Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls
contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period
to make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete
check of all systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one year warranty
period.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: Furnish stamped steel with hinged door and locking latch control
cabinets to protect and conceal all control devices. Arrange components neatly to provide
adequate maintenance opportunity and proper device function. Label all components,
numerically code all piping and wiring. Terminate all wiring at terminal blocks. Provide engraved
plastic labels for all panel face devices. Provide all panel wiring identification in compliance with
BYU-Idaho Standards.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 5
A. Provide with surge suppressor - one per panel.
B. Provide with 120/60/1 outlet - one per panel.
C. Provide with fuse - quantity as required.
D. Provide with transformer, 120/24 VAC, quantity as required.
E. Provide RS-232 service trunk from main panel into each ATC panel for "Laptop"
computer access.
2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS:
A. In supplying dampers, instruct the sheet metal (233300) workers in the proper installation
of the dampers. Ductwork shall be reinforced and the damper properly supported without
strain.
B. Protect all dampers mounted in a duct system which requires special treatment.
C. Provide damper operators with diaphragms or motors of proper size, so that the motors
will operate against the static pressure of the systems. Provide each damper motor with
a bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equivalent. Damper motors in
plenums shall be mounted on damper frames. Do not install motors in ducts. Modulating
motors where indicated shall be provided with integral stops for both minimum and
maximum stop.
D. Control dampers for outside air, relief air, exhaust air, ventilating air and other dampers
exposed to weather temperatures in built-up systems. Low leakage type with spring
loaded side seals, inflatable butyl or neoprene fabric edge seals, bronze or Teflon
bearings, reinforced galvanized steel blades. Blade orientation as indicated on the
Motorized Damper Equipment Schedule. Air leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM per
square foot at 4" upstream static pressure.
Johnson "Proportion-Aire" D-1200/D-1300.
Ruskin CD-50
Greenheck VCD-43
E. Electric Damper Actuators: Reference Section 230933 for 120 volt damper actuators and
Section 230923 for 24 volt damper actuators.
2.3 CONTROL VALVES:
A. General:
1. Furnish automatic control valves required by the project. Design valves to pass
the quantities of fluid at the pressure drop scheduled on the drawings.
2. Mount all control valves with stems in the up-vertical position.
B. Control Valve Sizes:
1. Valve sizes 2-1/2” through 6” used for controlling heating water, chilled water and
up to 50% propylene glycol: Valve body shall be flanged, ANSI Class 125, globe
style with cast iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel stem, metal to metal seat,
EDPM O-ring packing with equal percentage or linear flow characteristics.
Valves shall be of the 2-way or 3-way type as indicated on the Control Valve
Schedule. Provide a 5 year manufacturer warranty on the control valves.
Siemens Flowrite™ VF 599 Series or equal by T.A.C. or Belimo.
2. Valve sizes 1/2” through 2” used for controlling heating water, chilled water and
up to 50% propylene glycol: Valve body shall be threaded, ANSI Class 250, ball
style with brass body, stainless steel ball and stem, glass filled PTFE with EPDM
O-ring ball seals and steam seals. The valve shall be available in straight
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 6
through or 3-way mixing with three connections as indicated on the Control Valve
Schedule. Minimum close off rating - 200 psi. Provide a 5 year manufacturer
warranty on the control valves. Siemens 599 Series or equal by T.A.C. or
Belimo.
C. Control Valve Operators / Actuators: Reference Section 230923.
3.CONTROL SEQUENCES
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Provide new control systems to manage and manipulate new mechanical equipment in a
functional and energy conserving way.
B. Provide new control panels in the central fan rooms where indicated for control of the air
handling units, fan coil units, VAV boxes, etc.
C. Install new control communication wiring per the National Electric Code. Reference
Section 230923 for additional detail.
D. Set up separate control loops for each major fan system with options to favor one system
over another, or to have each system independent if the building area is physically
isolated from other buildings on campus.
3.2 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM:
A. The existing Central Control Unit provides for overall control and monitoring of the
Building System.
B. All new DDC panels shall provide programmable time clock functions, optimum start, and
signals to ATC panels and report space temperature and condition of air handling
systems and other mechanical systems.
C. Locate DDC panels in mechanical rooms and in rooms as shown on the drawings or as
directed in the field.
D. Provide a run time accumulator function on all pieces of HVAC equipment 5 HP and
above.
3.3 CAMPUS INTERFACE:
A. Connect new control systems into the existing Building Automation System in place.
3.4 VARIABLE VOLUME SUPPLY FAN STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL SEQUENCE(SF-100 thru
SF-400, VFD-100 thru VFD-400):
A. In automatic mode, each supply fan VFD starts via the DDC system, all safeties satisfied.
In “Hand”, the supply fans will run when all safeties are satisfied.
B. Control the speed of the supply fans through the duct static pressure sensors in order to
maintain the far end worst case duct static pressure set point at an initial value of 0.5"
W.C. The final value shall be determined by the testing and balancing contractor. Locate
the duct static pressure sensors at location(s) as determined by the Mechanical Engineer
working with this contractor in the field. Each duct static pressure sensor provides a
signal to the DDC controller. The DDC controller will provide a 4-20 ma input signal to
the supply fan wall VFD. See Specifications under Section 230513 related to the variable
speed drives.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 7
C. Interlock the supply fan VFD’s to the building fire alarm and to the safeties relay to
provide shutdown upon smoke detection, freezing conditions or high or low duct pressure
conditions.
D. Interlock the supply fan wall VFD’s with respective general exhaust fans where
applicable. Activate the respective supply fan wall VFD through the central control panel.
E. Interlock each unit’s outside air damper to close and each unit’s return air damper to
open when the unit’s supply fan wall is off.
F. Close the respective chilled water control valve to each unit’s cooling coil when each
unit’s supply fan wall is off.
G. Open the respective heating water control valve to each unit’s preheating coil when each
unit’s supply fan wall is off.
H. Set up each system so that the supply fan wall speed can also be set and adjusted
manually from a graphic screen on each fan wall VFD.
3.5 PACKAGED FAN COIL UNITS (FCU-1 thru FCU-5) CONSTANT VOLUME SUPPLY FAN
STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. Each Packaged Fan Coil Unit supply fan shall be provided with a Hand-Off-Auto switch
with indicator light by Division 23.
B.
C. In automatic mode, each Fan Coil Unit supply fan starts through via the DDC system, all
safeties satisfied. In “Hand”, the supply fans will run when all safeties are satisfied.
D. Interlock each Fan Coil Unit Hand-Off-Auto to the respective safeties relay to provide
shutdown upon low duct pressure and freezing conditions. Activate the respective fan coil
unit Hand-Off-Auto switch through the central control panel.
E. Interlock each unit’s outside air to close when the respective supply fans are off or during
unoccupied mode.
F. Close the respective chilled water control valve to each unit’s cooling coil when each
unit’s supply fans are off or during unoccupied mode.
G. Open the respective heating water control valve to each unit’s heating coil when each
unit’s supply fans are off or during unoccupied mode.
H. During occupied mode, each unit’s outside air damper opens at least to minimum position
when the respective supply fans run.
3.6 VARIABLE VOLUME FAN SYSTEMS TEMPERATURE CONTROL SEQUENCE (AHU-100 thru
AHU-400):
A. The DDC system shall control the system temperature.
B. Reference Paragraph 3.10 for minimum outside air control sequence. The economizer
control shall override the minimum outside air when outside conditions allow for free
cooling. The return air dampers shall track the outside air dampers.
C. A control loop sensing the discharge air temperature for each unit will modulate the unit’s
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 8
chilled water control valve, economizer dampers or pre-heating water control valve to
maintain a discharge temperature set point of 55°F (adjustable). Reset the discharge
temperature set point up from 55° F based on the space temperature of the coldest
spaces served by this system.
D. If the outside air temperature is 75°F or below, operate each unit in an economizer cycle
by modulating that unit’s the return air and outside air dampers to maintain a mixed air
temperature of 55°F (adj.), optimized for minimum mechanical cooling. Reset the low
limit along with the chilled water control valve to use outside air for cooling. Once the
outside air temperature exceeds 75°F (adj.), the outside air damper shall close to
minimum position.
E. If the discharge air temperature set point for each unit cannot be met by the use of
outside air, the chilled water control valve shall modulate open to provide chilled water to
the cooling coil. The chilled water return temperature related to the chilled water control
valve shall be sensed with input into the system controller to ensure that the chilled water
is being fully utilized.
F. If the discharge air temperature for each unit falls below 55°F (adj.) due to minimum
outside air requirements, each unit’s pre-heating water control valve shall modulate open
in order to maintain a discharge air temperature of 55°F (adj.) set point.
3.7 FAN COIL UNITS (FCU-1 thru FCU-5) TEMPERATURE CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. The DDC system shall control the system temperature for each system.
B. For each system, a control loop sensing the respective space temperature input will
modulate the unit’s chilled water valve or heating water valve to maintain the space
temperature set point.
C. Reference Paragraph 3.10 for minimum outside air control sequence. The economizer
control shall override the minimum outside air when outside conditions allow for free
cooling. The return air dampers shall track the outside air dampers.
D. On call for cooling, when the outside air temperature is favorable operate each unit
operates in an economizer cycle by modulating that unit’s the return air and outside air
dampers to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F (adj.), optimized for minimum
mechanical cooling. Reset the low limit along with the chilled water control valves to use
outside air for cooling. Once the outside air temperature exceeds 75°F (adj.), the outside
air dampers shall close to minimum position.
E. If the discharge air temperature set point for each unit cannot be met by the use of
outside air, the chilled water control valves shall modulate open to provide chilled water
to the cooling coil(s). The chilled water return temperature related to each chilled water
control valve shall be sensed with input into the system controller to ensure that the
chilled water is being fully utilized.
F. On call for heating, the respective unit’s heating water control valve shall modulate open
through the DDC system to provide heating water to the heating coil in order to satisfy the
heating space temperature set point of 72°F (adj.). The heating discharge temperature
high limit shall be set at 95°F (adj.).
3.8 CHILLED WATER RETURN TEMPERATURE CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. For all air handling systems, each cooling coil chilled water return temperature shall be
sensed with input into the respective system controller to ensure that the chilled water
serving the building is being fully utilized. When each cooling coil CHWR temperature is
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 9
at set point or above, the respective cooling coil chilled water control valve modulates
open as needed to maintain the CHWR set point allowing building CHWR to flow back to
the Central Plant. When the CHWR temperature is below set point, the respective
cooling coil chilled water control valve modulates closed as needed to maintain the delta
T set point between CHWR and CHWS serving the respective cooling coil. The building
CHW system is conversely made up from CHWS from the Central Plant.
3.9 NIGHT SET BACK CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. The building DDC system has all building air handling units off during unoccupied hours.
Should the unoccupied temperature drop to 65°F, the space sensor or combined average
space sensors controlling the VAV boxes activates the constant volume air handling units
and VAVR systems heating functions until the temperature rises to 65°F.
3.10 MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR CONTROL SEQUENCE:
A. The outside air dampers serving the respective air handling systems modulate open to
minimum position as specified and as needed to lower the CO2 and volatile organic
concentration levels below set point.
3.11 CO2 AND VOC MONITORING:
A. Where indicated on the Control Diagrams, the CO2 and volatile organic sensors measure
concentration levels in the return air stream entering each air handling system in order to
modulate the respective units outside air damper in order to keep these levels below the
maximums allowed.
B. Sensed high concentration levels are alarmed at the central DDC system.
3.12 ROOM/SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SEQUENCES:
A. VARIABLE VOLUME COOLING WITH REHEAT (For all VAVR boxes except VAVR-4,
VAVR-6a, VAVR-6b, VAVR-12a, VAVR-12b, VAVR-14a, VAVR-14b and VAVR-18):
1. Each room/space VAV box with reheat coil shall be provided with a VAV box inlet
cross flow velocity/temperature sensor and outlet temperature sensor. The VAV
dampers are normally closed.
2. Each room/space VAV box with reheat coil shall be controlled by a DDC
controller fed through the central control panel. This will allow for remote
monitoring and remote changing of unit parameters.
3. When the room/space temperature rises above the set point of the unit controller
as sensed by the space sensor, the VAV box damper will modulate open from its
occupied minimum cfm setting toward the cooling cfm set point to satisfy the
cooling set point temperature and the heating coil valve will be closed.
4. As the room/space temperature drops to set point, the VAV box damper
modulates down to its occupied minimum setting. This minimum shall be fully
automatically adjustable and set as called for on the Drawings.
5. When the room/space temperature drops below set point, the VAV box damper
shall modulate open from its occupied minimum setting to its heating cfm setting
and the heating water valve shall modulate open to satisfy the heating set point
temperature.
B. BISHOP’S OFFICES (VAVR-4, VAVR-18):
1. The control sequence for these systems is similar to the sequence indicated
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 10
under 3.12.A, except that each VAVR box shall be controlled by the average
signal of three temperature sensors located in each of the respective Bishop’s
Office areas they are serving.
C. CHAPELS (VAVR-6a & VAVR-6b, VAVR-12a & VAVR-12b):
1. The control sequence for these systems is similar to the sequence indicated
under 3.12.A, except that each set of VAVR boxes shall be controlled by the
temperature sensor located in the respective Chapel they are serving.
D. CULTURAL HALL (VAVR-14a & VAVR-14b):
1. The control sequence for these systems is similar to the sequence indicated
under 3.12.A, except that both VAVR boxes shall be controlled by the average
signal of four temperature sensors located in the Cultural Hall.
3.13 FAN COIL UNITS CONTROL SEQUENCE (FCU-6 thru FCU-9):
A. For FCU-6 and FCU-7, upon a rise in temperature or a drop in temperature, a wall
mounted space temperature sensor acting through the DDC controller modulates opens
the chilled water or the heating water control valve and starts the fan coil unit fan for both
Fan Coil Units in order to maintain the space temperature set point.
B. For FCU-8 and FCU-9, each Fan Coil Unit operates through its own factory wired
controls to satisfy the local heating set point space temperature by opening the
respective heating control valve to the heating coil and starting the respective supply fan.)
3.14 GENERAL EXHAUST FANS CONTROL SEQUENCE (EF-1 and EF-2):
A. Each general exhaust fan shall be provided with a Hand-Off-Auto switch by Division 23.
B. In hand mode the respective exhaust fan runs continuously. In auto mode the respective
exhaust fan shall cycle from a start/stop signal from the Central Control System through
the DDC panel.
C. Each general exhaust fan shall run continuous during occupied hours.
D. When each fan runs its respective backdraft exhaust damper opens.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 1
SECTION 23 0923
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC)
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment necessary
to complete the temperature control work for the entire project.
A. Interlock with a BACnet signal from the updated Building Automation System (BAS) to the new
Air Handling Unit and Fan Coil Units DDC Panels.
B. Extend and connect control wiring from indicated control components to new Local Application
Specific Controllers serving each new Air Handling Unit located in the local fan room.
C. Extension of BACnet communication wiring from the updated BAS to each new Air Handling Unit
Local Application Specific Controller.
D. Adjustment and validation of modified and new control systems. Instruction of Owner's
representative on maintenance and operation of modified and new control equipment.
E. Remote Monitoring and Control Communications capability through direct communication to the
Owner’s updated Central Operators Workstation.
F. The modified system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment as hereinafter
specified.
1. Air Handling Systems
2. Exhaust Fan Control
3. Variable Air Volume Boxes
4. Miscellaneous - Ventilation Systems, Cabinet Heaters.
5. Other Systems
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900.
A. This specification wording is based on Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys System product line. The
building automation system will be updated to the latest version of the Metasys in conjunction
with this project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 230900.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900.
1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900.
1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900.
1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900.
1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 2
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: See Section 230900.
A. Panel mount all controllers and devices other than remote sensors and operators. Provide
permanent labels, terminal blocks, etc.
2.2 CONTROL SOURCES:
A. POWER SUPPLY:
1. Furnish complete power supply for all new application controllers at appropriate voltage
and in adequate capacity. Provide multiple power supply devices, mount conveniently in
Mechanical Room or spaces as directed. Load power supply units to no more than 70
percent of nameplate capacity.
2. Run all power wiring in conduit, neatly arranged and coordinated with other trades.
Plenum rated cable may be used above fully accessible ceilings only. Securely anchor
and note in organized fashion.
3. Group boxes served by each power supply unit in proximity, provide permanent mounted
schedule of boxes served by each power supply.
B. COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS:
1. Connect each and every new Application Specific Controller (ASC) into the existing
Network Control Units (NCU) extending back to the Central Microprocessor with required
conductors. Avoid common conduit with AC voltage or inductive loads. All in accordance
with National Electric Code, conductors either plenum rated cable or installed in conduit
(3/4" minimum). The LAN Network shall be twisted pair or coax.
2. Connect into the updated central communications panel and fiber optic hub.
3. Connect into the updated communications from hub back to Physical Plant.
2.3 DAMPERS: See Section 230900.
2.4 ELECTRIC DEVICES: See Section 230933.
2.5 DIRECT DIGITAL SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (DDC):
A. Connect to updated system.
2.6 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS:
A. Tie into the updated communications system:
2.7 STANDALONE NETWORK CONTROL UNITS (NCU):
A. GENERAL: Standalone NCU panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user,
real-time digital control processors. Each standalone NCU panel shall consist of modular
hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and
input/output modules.
B. CAPABILITY: Each new NCU panel shall have 2 Meg of DRAM memory, an 80186 processor,
64K EPROM and 4 communication ports. Each new NCU panel shall support its own operating
system and databases including:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 3
1. Control processes
2. Energy Management Applications
3. Alarm Management
4. Historical/Trend Data for all points
5. Maintenance Support Applications
6. Custom Processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Dial-Up Communications
9. Manual Override Monitoring
C. POINT TYPES: Each NCU panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control
3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements
either electric or pneumatic
4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary
equipment either electric or pneumatic
5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
D. CONTINUOUS 24 HOUR POINT HISTORIES: Each NCU panel without software programming
by the operator shall store Point History Files for every analog and binary input and output points.
1. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all
analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24
hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem-
related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and
analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes of
commands for each point.
** NOTE: This feature must be demonstrated on the portable operator terminal.
E. SERIAL COMMUNICATION PORTS: Standalone NCU panels shall provide at least two
RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O
devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel
mounted or portable NCU panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone NCU panels shall allow
temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently
connected modems, printers, or network terminals.
F. HARDWARE OVERRIDE SWITCHES: The operator at the NCU panel shall have the ability to
manually override the NCU Panel terminated points via local, point discrete, onboard hand/auto
operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for electronic or
pneumatic analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the
panel is powered or not.
G. HARDWARE OVERRIDE MONITORING: NCU panels shall monitor the status or position of all
overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that
automatic control has been placed in hardware override. NCU panels shall also collect override
activity information for daily and monthly reports.
H. LOCAL STATUS INDICATOR LAMPS: The NCU panel with terminated points, shall provide local
status indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point
conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
I. INTEGRATED ON-LINE DIAGNOSTICS: Each NCU panel shall continuously perform
self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The NCU
panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or
repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided
at each NCU panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 4
J. SURGE AND TRANSIENT PROTECTION: Isolation shall be provided at all network
terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients
consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all
signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical
code.
K. POWERFAIL RESTART: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly
shutdown of all standalone NCU panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system
software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data,
and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the NCU panel shall automatically resume full
operation without manual intervention.
2. Should NCU panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of
reloading the NCU panel via the local area network, via the local RS-232C port, or via
telephone line dial-in.
3. Each Control Module within an NCU shall have separate independent power supplies
with OFF/ON switches to allow operator to remove individual control modules without
powering down the entire NCU panel.
4. Each NCU panel shall have a build-in duplex power outlet for operator use.
5. NCU panels shall provide communications points as follows to meet the project design
requirements:
6. 1 Slot Network Communications Interface Only
7. 2 Slot Network Communications PLUS;
a. 10 Analog Input & 10 Analog Output Points
b. (Pneumatic or Electric)
c. or32 Binary Input Points
d. or8 Binary Output & 8 Binary Output Points
8. 5 Slot Network Communications PLUS;
a. 20 Analog Input & 20 Analog Output Points
b. (Pneumatic or Electric)
c. or 64 Binary Input Points
d. or16 Binary Input & 16 Binary Output Points
e. orAny Combination of 2 of the Above 2 Slot Configurations.
2.8 NCU SOFTWARE FEATURES:
A. GENERAL:
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this
specification shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of
the NCU panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 5
B. CONTROL SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION:
1. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The NCU panels shall have the ability to perform the
following pre-tested control algorithms:
a. Two Position Control
b. Proportional Control
c. Proportional plus Integral Control
d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning
2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the
number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive
demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays
between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the NCU panel shall
analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
2.9 ENERGY MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS: NCU Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of
the following energy management routines:
A. Time of Day Scheduling
B. Calendar Based Scheduling
C. Holiday Scheduling
D. Temporary Schedule Overrides
E. Optimal Start
F. Optimal Stop
G. Night Setback Control
H. Fan Speed/CFM Control
I. Heating/Cooling Interlock
J. Cold Deck Reset
K. Mixed Air
L. Minimum Outside Air
M. Hot Water Reset
N. Chilled Water Reset
O. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall
be flexible enough to allow user customization.
2.10 CUSTOM PROCESS PROGRAMMING CAPABILITY: NCU panels shall be able to execute custom,
job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control
routines.
A. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom
process:
1. Any system-measured point data or status
2. Any calculated data
3. Any results from other processes
4. User-Defined Constants
5. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exp, etc.)
6. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
7. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 6
8. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
a. Time interval
b. Time of day
c. Date
d. Other processes
e. Time programming
f. Events (e.g., point alarms)
9. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or
calculated data from any and all other NCU panels on the local area network.
10. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all
other NCU panels on the local area network.
11. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages
and advisories to any devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a
specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a
dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager.
12. Custom Process Documentation: The graphics programming language (GPL) for custom
control programs shall be self-documenting. All inter-relationships defined by GPL
feature shall be documented via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors.
13. Note: For owner's ability to add or modify custom programs, without the requirements of
the manufacturer's involvement, the ATC Contractor shall provide and install, in the
Central Operator's Workstation, Graphics Programming Language software.
2.11 ALARM MANAGEMENT: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each NCU panel shall perform distributed, independent
alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network
traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the NCU panel's ability to report alarms be
affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other
panels on the network.
A. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's
English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
B. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms
shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical
alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each NCU panel shall automatically
inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have
the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
C. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be
acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later
date.
D. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined list of
operator devices, or PCs used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically
directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line.
E. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be
able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm
condition or direct operator response.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 7
F. Each standalone NCU panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 Alarm Messages.
Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel.
2.12 HISTORICAL DATA AND TREND ANALYSIS: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be
provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways.
A. Continuous 24 Hour Point Histories: Standalone NCU panels shall store Point History Files for all
analog and binary inputs and outputs.
B. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog
inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow
the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem-related events for the
past day.
1. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include
a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point.
2. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone NCU panels shall also provide high
resolution sampling capability with an operator-adjustable resolution of 10-300 seconds in
one-second increments for verification of control loop performance.
3. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall
also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting
operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of
1 minute to 2 hours, in one-minute intervals, shall be provided. Each standalone NCU
panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a
minimum of 5000 data samples.
4. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone NCU panels,
and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based
upon either user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become
full. All trend data shall be available in disk file form for use in 3rd Party personal
computer applications.
2.13 RUNTIME TOTALIZATION: Standalone NCU panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime
hours for binary input and output points.
A. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
B. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique,
user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.14 ANALOG/PULSE TOTALIZATION: Standalone NCU panels shall automatically sample, calculate and
store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analog and binary pulse
input-type points.
A. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g.
KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.).
B. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
C. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be
generated when the limit is reached.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 8
2.15 EVENT TOTALIZATION: Standalone NCU panels shall have the ability to count events such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a
daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
A. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of
9,999,999 events before reset.
B. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be
generated when the limit is reached.
2.16 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC):
A. Each fan system/air handler or VAV boxes shall be controlled by a stand-alone DDC controller.
The controller shall include all hardware and programs.
B. The DDC controller application programs shall reside in the DDC controller providing stand-alone
control when host communication is not possible. The application program shall be maintained at
the DDC controller in E2PROM. The default database, i.e., setpoints and configuration
information, shall be stored in E2PROM.
C. DDC controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host shall not be
acceptable. The zone controller shall run the control application using the default setpoints and
configuration even after a power failure with host disabled.
D. Controllers integrated with pneumatic damper actuators shall be furnished with electric to
pressure function modules.
1. Function modules shall have a manual/auto override selection mode with an on/off switch
for binary outputs, 0-20 psi hand gradual switch for pneumatic outputs.
E. Each Standalone NCU Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through
the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).
F. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a
microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
G. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases
including:
1. Generic Input/Output Monitor & Control
2. Control Processes
3. Energy Management Applications
4. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
H. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service
terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1. Display temperatures
2. Display status
3. Display setpoints
4. Display control parameters
5. Override binary output control
6. Override analog setpoints
7. Modification of gain and offset constants
8. Modified selected HVAC configuration programs and down load modifications.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 9
I. Each ASC shall be able to accept nickel resistant, voltage or current input sensors.
2.17 POWERFAIL PROTECTION: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other
programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate
reprogramming the controller.
2.18 APPLICATION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE: A pre-written ASC HVAC software program shall be provided to
the owner with common ASHRAE HVAC sequences of operations for single zone, multizone, VAV units.
This software program shall have pre-written sequences of operations where the owner can select system
designs, with prompted default values or configure HVAC ASC for generic input/output for monitor and
control.
A. Software program shall be capable of printing out owner selected sequence of operation,
setpoints, and ASC predetermined wire termination guide for each input/output point.
B. Prior to putting Application Specific Controller on-line in an HVAC operating environment, the
application specific software shall have a commissioning mode, so the owner can simulate the
control sequence through assigning default values or by actual, connecting hardware to the ASC
Controller at the owner's lab or test bench.
2.19 UNITARY CONTROLLERS:
A. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems with
prewritten application specific software:
1. Generic Input/Output Monitor and Control
2. Cabinet Heaters
B. Unitary Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
1. Economizer Switchover Inputs
a. Drybulb
b. Outdoor Air Enthalpy
c. Differential Temperature
d. Binary Input from a separate controller
2. Economizer Outputs
a. Integrated Analog with minimum position
b. Binary output to enable self-contained economizer actuator
3. Heating and Cooling Outputs
a. 1 to 3 Stages
b. Analog Output with two-pipe logic
c. Reversing valve logic for Heat Pumps
4. Fan Output
a. On/Off Logic Control
C. Unitary controllers shall support pre-written software configured control strategies, or generic
monitor and control for future expansion or retrofit for:
1. Daily/Weekly Schedules
2. Comfort/Occupancy Mode
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 10
3. Economy Mode
a. Standby Mode/Economizer Available
b. Unoccupied/Economizer Not Available
c. Shutdown
d. Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode
4. Temporary Override Mode
a. Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Base Control)
b. Boost (Occupant Warmer/Cooler Control
D. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each Unitary Controller shall have a
provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall
switch or an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall automatically select either
Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying
comfort conditions.
E. Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary
output to serve as the interface to an associated lighting relay. Based upon the status of either
an occupancy sensing device, or manual wall switch, the Unitary Controller shall provide a
contact output to automatically adjust the lighting level to accommodate occupant requirements
while reducing electrical consumption. Standby/Comfort (described in the previous section) and
Lighting overrides shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
2.20 ALARM MANAGEMENT: Each Unitary Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and
analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
A. Minimum point type and quantity shall be as follows:
1. Analog Inputs - 6
2. Binary Inputs - 4
3. Binary Outputs - 6 or 8
4. Analog Outputs - 2 or 0 with 8 binary outputs
2.21 AHU CONTROLLERS:
A. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems with
prewritten application specific software:
1. Generic Input/Output Monitor and Control
2. Large Air Handling Units
3. Mixed Air-Single Path
a. Mixed Air-Dual Path
b. 100% Single Path
c. 100% Dual Path
B. AHU Controller shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified
control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. The minimum point type and quantity shall be
as follows:
1. Analog Inputs - 8
2. Binary Inputs - 8
3. Binary Outputs - 10
4. Analog Outputs - 6
C. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified
control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 11
D. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform HVAC
sequence of operation or generic input/output monitor and control, without the operator having to
use programming languages.
2.22 OCCUPANCY-BASED STANDBY/COMFORT MODE CONTROL: Each AHU Controller shall have a
provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch
or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort
mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.
2.23 ALARM MANAGEMENT: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and
analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
2.24 VAV BOX CONTROLLER: (One for each box.) The ATC contractor shall furnish pressure independent
digital electronic VAV box controllers and accessories and make field installations to accomplish the
procedures and sequences as indicated in Sections 23 05 93 and 23 09 00.
A. VAV controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems:
1. Single Duct
2. Single Duct with Reheat
3. Supply/Exhaust
B. VAV controllers shall support prewritten software configured control strategies:
1. Pressure Dependent
2. Pressure Independent
3. Variable Volume
4. Constant Volume
5. Auto Zero of Flow Transducers
C. Each VAV zone controller shall be a standalone DDC controller. The controller shall include all
hardware and software required for communication with the local Network Control Unit (NCU).
D. The control program shall reside in the VAV zone controller. The application program shall be
maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. Setpoints and configuration information, shall be
stored in EEPROM.
E. Each VAV controller shall have a provision for setback, setup, shutdown, or morning warmup and
cooldown.
F. Each VAV controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the
contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device.
G. Communications to the local NCU shall be at least 9600 baud.
H. Minimum point type and quantity shall be a follows:
1. Analog Inputs 6
2. Binary Inputs 4
3. Analog Outputs 2 or 0
4. Binary Outputs 6 or 8
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 12
2.25 ZONE SENSOR: (Room Thermostat)
A. The Zone sensor shall be a Johnson Controls TE-6000 with programming jack series or equal.
Sensor cover shall be a beige high impact plastic cover with brushed aluminum face. Sensor
dimensions shall not exceed 3" x 4" and shall not protrude from the wall more than 2".
1. Sensors with a no external controls shall be installed in all transient areas.
2. Sensors with override switches shall be installed in all open work areas and multiple
private office zones.
3. Sensors with override switches and setpoints shall be installed in all single zone private
offices and conference rooms.
4. Provide a mechanism for adjusting setpoint within a limited range at the sensor. Provide
legend indicating the graduated scale temperature setpoints on the sensor face.
5. Provide an override switch to signal the controller when the zone is occupied.
6. The temperature sensor shall be a high quality, high output, wire wound nickel resistant
sensor. The temperature sensing element shall be mounted under the aluminum
faceplate allowing the sensor appropriate response to the zone's thermal elements.
Installed accuracy shall be +1oF over a 32oF to 86oF range.
7. The zone sensor shall include a jack for connection of the service tool. To prevent
unauthorized tampering and vandalism, the jack shall be mounted under the sensor's
cover. The cover shall be held in place by a recessed socket head set screw requiring an
Allen wrench for removal. Sensors having the service tool jack exposed shall not be
accepted.
2.26 VAV BOX VELOCITY SENSING: (For Air Control Boxes - VAV Boxes)
A. Control shall be pressure independent using velocity pressure sensing to determine flow rate.
The sensor shall be a Johnson DPT-2000 or equivalent. The velocity sensor shall use pressure
differential technology and operate from .02" to 6" wg. The auto reset minimum CFM shall be set
by the air balancer.
B. The VAV box air flow sensing tube shall be furnished and install by the VAV box supplier prior to
shipment to the project sight.
2.27 AIR CONTROL BOX ACTUATOR:
A. The air valve shall be positioned by a dual synchronous 3-point floating motor provided by
Johnson Controls, Inc. series EDP-2040, or equivalent. The motor shall operate the damper from
full closed to full open no faster than 4 minutes and no slower than 8 minutes. Motor gears and
housing shall be metallic to insure long motor life.
B. The motor assembly shall slip over the damper shaft and lock into position using knurled set
screws. Rotation shall be adjustable from 30o to 90o in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
direction. The motor frame shall be mounted to the box with no more than three screws. To
minimize maintenance costs over the life of the installation, the gear motor shall be a separate
component. Motors which are an integral part of the controller shall not be accepted.
C. Damper motors for the VAV Boxes shall be electric direct mount actuator with a magnetic clutch
to provide torque protection. Actuator shall have an adjustable rotation from 30 to 90 degrees,
clockwise or counter-clockwise. The actuator shall be capable of having a one, two or six minute
travel time. Each actuator shall have manual override, gear release lever. Actuators shall be of
the push-pull type for either modulating or two positioning control. Actuators shall stroke by a
rotating motion of an overload-proof synchronous motor. Control voltage shall be either 24 VAC
or 0-20 VDC as required by the application. Actuators shall be available with spring return to the
fully extended position upon power failure. Three (3) point floating actuator shall be available with
adjustable end switches. Minimum/maximum manual positioners shall be available for
proportional motors. Belimo
2.28 APPLICATION SPECIFIC FUNCTION MODULES:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 13
2.29 RELAY KIT (RLY): A relay kit with manual override switch shall be furnished and installed on all digital
outputs signals for start/stop of the Air Handling Units and associated equipment. The relay kits shall be
installed for ease of maintenance and manual overriding of binary output points. Each relay kit shall have
the following built-in features:
A. Auto/Manual Switch to Enable/Disable Local Control
B. Separate On/Off Buttons for Override Control
C. Local Relay Kit Monitoring Contact to advise the operator at the NCU or Operator's Workstation if
any of the Auto/Manual Switches have been placed in the Manual Override Position.
D. Override switches shall be able to operate the motor loads or starter coils whether the controller
is powered or de-energized.
2.30 INPUT ANALOG PRESSURE (IAP): When required to interface pneumatic inputs to an ASC or NCU,
and IAP shall be installed to convert the pneumatic pressure to a voltage output.
2.31 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR OUTSIDE, RETURN, AND RELIEF DAMPERS AND OTHER
ACTUATORS REQUIRING SPRING RETURN:
A. Electronic direct-coupled actuators shall be provided. The actuator shall be fastened to the
damper shaft via a clamp assembly of a V bolt design, with associated V shaped toothed cradle.
Where direct-couple mounting is not feasible, provide factory cataloged brackets, mounting kits,
and hardware. All outside air, return air, relief air, return/relief air and exhaust air motorized
dampers shall be provided with an internal mechanical spring return mechanism built into the
actuator housing. Non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operations shall not be acceptable. Spring
return actuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting. All outside air, relief air and exhaust
air dampers shall be normally closed. All return air and return/relief air dampers shall be normally
open. The actuators shall be of sufficient capacity to provide a minimum of 5 in-lb/sq.ft. for
opposed blade dampers and 7 in-lb/sq.ft. for parallel blade dampers. All actuators shall be
brushless DC motors. Mounting shall provide for servicing and proper alignment with the damper
shaft to minimize drag and slippage on the shaft.
B. Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 listed. The actuator shall be have electronic overload or
digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of
the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutch protection shall not be acceptable. All
24 VAV/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring, and shall not require more than 10 VA for
AC, or more then 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting
and a minimum 3 foot electrical cable, and shall be pre-wired. Actuators shall be designed for a
minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator’s rated torque, and shall have a 2 year
unconditional manufacturer’s warranty.
C. Proportional actuators shall provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA operating range, and shall provide a
2-10 VDC position feedback signal. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width modulating
control signal and providing full proportional operation of the damper is acceptable. All
modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of
rotation.
D. Where noted on the drawings, provide damper operators to meet Class I Div II and Class II Div II
requirements.
E. Manufacturer: Johnson, Seimens, Belimo.
2.32 VALVE ACTUATORS:
A. General: Furnish valve actuators with adequate capacity to operate the valve smoothly through
the operating range. Provide oversized motors or operator if needed. Voltage ranges shall be
adjustable.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 14
B. Valve actuators for control of hot water and chilled water shall be of the modulating type with a
range of at least 100 to 1. Valves actuator shall be electric with either proportional or incremental
control. Reference Section 230900 for description of control valve bodies.
2.33 PRESSURE SWITCH FOR DIRTY FILTER INDICATION:
A. .05 - 12" wg adjustable Dwyer 1630
B. Johnson P-32
2.34 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS:
A. General: Differential pressure sensors shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential
pressure. The sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a function module kit.
Use 0-3 WC for duct static and 0-.3" WC for building static. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or
minus 2% of the span. Reference sensor to outside for duct static control.
B. Sensor/Transmitter Air: Dwyer Series 600 with control point at 60 percent of scale range.
Furnish adjustment tool, mounting hardware, tubing adapters, sensing insertion tube. Provide
power supply. Mount unit in cabinet at mechanical room. Extend 3/8" minimum tubing to sensing
point (both duct and reference). Deliver 4-20 ma signal to receiver/controller.
C. Receiver Controller: Johnson Controls Series to accept and condition duct sensor/transmitter
signal for delivery to VFD. Install complete with VFD package. Independent systems for both
heating and cooling services.
2.35 HAND/AUTO SWITCHES, manual analog output devices (potentiometers), hand graduals, etc., as
needed.
2.36 TEMPERATURE SENSORS:
A. Furnish and install electronic room, duct and immersion temperature transmitters of the linear
precision resistance element of resistance averaging element. Their range shall be -55oF to
250oF with an accuracy of plus or minus .25oF. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable
provided they are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy.
B. Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor (PTC) nickel wire, or silicon type with a high
resistance change versus temperature change to insure good resolution and accuracy. Sensors
shall be available for room, duct or wall mounting. Sensors shall connect to remote controller by
means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Room type sensors shall be available with built-in setpoint
potentiometer and programming jack. Sensors shall be available in various ranges to properly
suit the application.
1. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series (temperature sensor only), Johnson Controls Inc.
2. HE-6413 series (humidity/temperature).
C. Duct-mounted averaging type temperature sensor shall utilize a nickel resistance sensing
element incorporated in a copper capillary of 27 feet. The sensor shall vary the output voltage
with a change in temperature. Sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a three-
wire unshielded cable. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series.
D. Outdoor air sensor shall be of the PTC silicon, nickel or RTD type with a high resistance change
versus temperature change. Sensor shall be available for outdoor or duct mounting. Sensor
shall connect to remote controller by means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Shield outside air
sensing transmitter from the effects of sunlight.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 15
E. Where transmitters are used for sensing liquid temperatures, furnish with brass separate wells.
2.37 AIR DUCT DETECTORS: Furnished, installed and wired by Division 26, Electrical Contractor.
2.38 LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS:
A. Provide manual reset low limit thermostats in the leaving air of each coil that is subject to freezing
conditions and as specified elsewhere in these specifications. Thermostats shall have a 20 foot
(minimum) element and shall respond to the coldest one foot section of that element. Provide
sufficient thermostats to adequately protect the entire coil face area (a minimum of one for every
40 square feet of coil). Unless otherwise specified, activation of the low limit thermostat shall stop
the air handling unit, close the outside air damper.
2.39 NETWORK TERMINAL:
A. Furnish one (1) portable NCU Operator's Terminal to the Systems Operation Department.
B. Standalone NCU panel Portable Operator's Terminals: Each NCU panel shall be capable of
supporting an operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data
display, including 24 hour continuous Point History display of all points. Display shall be in
English language format, menu driven. Numerical coded or alpha-numeric coded operator's
access shall not be allowed.
1. The NCU panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6 points
with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic displays
depicting entire mechanical systems.
2. The operator functions provided by the NCU panel Operator Terminal shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
a. View "Online Help" menu in English language to assist operator utilization.
b. Start and Stop Points
c. Modify Setpoints
d. Modify PID Loop Setpoints
e. Override PID Control
f. Change Time/Date
g. Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling
h. Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling
i. Enter Temporary Override Schedules
j. Define Holiday Schedules
k. View Analog Limits
l. Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits
m. Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits
n. Enter/Modify Analog Differentials
o. View Point History Files
p. 5 Levels of Password Access
3. The NCU panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in
the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This
capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global points", but shall
provide totally open exchange of all data between the operator terminal and any NCU
panel in the network.
4. Operator password access at all NCU panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each
other, as well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 16
changes shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network.
5. The NCU panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to eliminate
the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be
provided consistent with a user's password clearance and the types of points being
displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.
6. A multi-function touchpad shall be provided for point and command selection, as well as
parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the NCU panel Operator
Terminal shall change and limit touchpad functions based upon an operator's password
clearance, the function being performed, and types of points being displayed. Screen
displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions.
7. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help" manuals and tutorials shall be
provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system
operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently
displayed menus.
8. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network devices.
The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access
points at the NCU panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look-up
tables.
9. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the NCU panel Operator's Terminal shall allow a
user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall provide a
record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30-minute intervals, or a record
of the last ten status changes for binary type points.
2.40 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD): The VFD's shall be furnished and installed as specified.
A. The DDC controller shall furnish required 4-20ma control signal to modulate the VFD.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 COMPLETE SYSTEM:
A. Integrate into all new controls into the updated Johnson Controls System. Provide all controls
and related functions, with all power and communications wiring, with sensors, room thermostats,
actuators, valves, dampers, etc.
B. Note that the terminal box controller is to provide a "pressure independent" function for any
terminal box provided for this project.
C. Participate in the checkout and commissioning and shake out of all of the mechanical systems.
Provide complete and detailed checkout and testing of all controls and control sequences.
Provide thermal rise trend recording and logs during system testing and shake out, which
includes, but is not necessarily limited to thermal trend for; sequence during simulated campus
CHW failure operation, and sequence during simulated chiller failure and operation sequence
before thermal load and with thermal load.
D. Contractor shall coordinate with BYU personnel to get Ethernet jacks installed. For
communication from front-end server to the jack panels in the field.
3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES:
A. The sequences of control for the DDC system shall be equivalent to those specified for the base
bid system with the added benefits of programmable algorithmic control.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0923 - 17
B. Fully describe the sequences in the submittals.
C. Fully document all work by shop drawing and product bulletin submittal, work from reviewed
drawings, maintain record documents during installation, provide a complete "As-Built" document
set in Autocad 2005 at completion.
3.3 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE:
A. GENERAL: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to
acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the
Architect requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the
software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance
testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request.
When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the
system will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time.
B. FIELD EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURES: All new DDC controls panels shall be demonstrated
via a functional end to end test. Such that:
1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their
operations verified.
2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation.
3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and
observing the appropriate change of displaying value.
4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all
interlocked points.
5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and
observing the proper corrective system response.
6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and
observing the correct response on the controlled outputs.
C. WORKSTATION TEST PROCEDURES: The system workstation test procedures shall be as
follows:
1. Communication with each new DDC control panel shall be demonstrated.
2. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated.
3. Control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation.
4. All available system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the system workstation.
5. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated.
6. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode.
D. AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION: See Section 230900.
E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: See Section 230900.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0933 - 1
SECTION 23 0933
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Electric control functions and systems indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Complete interrelationships with automation systems and mechanical equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 23 09 00.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900.
1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900.
1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900.
1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900.
1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900.
2.MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY:
A. Obtain power from Division 26 distribution panel. Furnish appropriate circuit breakers and extend
conduit and wiring assigned to this division.
B. Furnish and install UL listed voltage reducing transformers required for this work. Size
transformers to see no more than 70 percent of rated capacity at full load. Use industrial quality
"machine tool" grade transformers.
C. Make all electrical installations in conformance with the National Electrical Code (current edition)
and in accordance with Division 26.
D. Use same product lines for similar devices as used by electrician to result in a coherent project.
E. Control Wiring:
1. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may be installed without
conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed Article 725 Plenum Cable. Install the
cable parallel to building walls.
2. In all other building areas, ie., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, high temperature water
rooms, above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control wiring shall be installed in
conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall be square with the walls of the
buildings.
3. Number and code all wiring.
F. Use no wire smaller than 16 gauge, no conduit smaller than 1/2".
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0933 - 2
2.3 DAMPER POSITION RHEOSTATS:
A. Wall-mounted, line voltage, adjustable dial with 0-100% damper position range.
B. Honeywell or prior approved equal.
2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS: For installation in all fan systems above 2,000 cfm, systems 15,000 cfm and
larger require two such, one in return, one in supply air, furnished by Division 260000 and installed by this
Division. Power and fire alarm wiring by Division 260000, control circuit alarm contact by this Division.
2.5 FREEZESTATS:
Manual reset, non-averaging, extended capillary tubes. Honeywell
L-480G, Johnson A11A-I/A70HA-1. Penetrate plenum wall with grommet protection, support capillary on
1/4" copper tubing. Use DPDT action as needed or auxiliary relays with powered circuits.
2.6 FIRESTATS, HI-LIMIT THERMOSTAT:
Manual reset, break on rise for protection, make on rise for alarm with relay needed to make on rise.
Honeywell L-4029E.
Johnson A25AN-1
2.7 AUXILIARY RELAYS:
Light Duty - Honeywell R4222/R8222.
Heavy Duty - Square D, Class 8501, Type X.
T-E, S & S.
2.7 TIME DELAY RELAYS:
A. Aquastat Series 7000 with appropriate action.
2.8 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR EXHAUST FANS OR VENTILATION FANS:
A. General Actuators: 120 VAC, 2-position control. Size motor to damper for non-overloading
characteristics. Fit with adjustable position and switches to limit stroke. Two-position actuators
shall not require more than 10 VA.
B. Manufacturer: Johnson, Siemens, Belimo.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 1
SECTION 23 2000
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 232113 General Pipes and Fittings section, and is part of each Division 23
section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein.
C. Division 230000 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This section is generic in that it describes material and installation required by several other
sections of this specification.
B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following:
1. Steel Piping
2. Copper Piping
3. Cast-Iron Pressure Piping
4. Cast-Iron Soil Piping
5. Grooved Joint Piping
6. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products.
C. Pipes and pipe fittings furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of
equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe fittings
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Firm with at least three years history of successful experience on projects of similar
nature.
2. Licensed as a firm in the contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah.
3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all
other work in progress by the contractor.
4. All workmen employed on the project to carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice
pipe fitters with additional certification for welders.
C. Welding Certification:
1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months prior to
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 2
working on the project.
2. The test shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313.
3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at
the job site in the positions required (flat, verticle, overhead etc).
4. Submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the Project Manager for
approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be used on the project until so
certified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and
dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. Submit piping schedule showing
manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system.
B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.
C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of mechanical fitting.
Include this data, product data, and certifications in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes And Standards:
1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.
2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping
work.
3. NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable water, provide pipes
and pipe fittings bearing approval label by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending.
B. Store pipe in a manner to prevent dirt and debris from entering piping. When possible store steel
and copper pipes and tubing inside and protected from weather. Whether stored inside or
outside elevate above grade and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. Raise slightly one
end of sealed piping to prevent accumulations of condensate and pitting where condensate
accumulates.
C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by
packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 3
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall
thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not
indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation
requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. Use United
States (domestic) manufactured pipe only. Do not use foreign made pipe.
B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and
pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types
matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise
indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and
with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Use domestic
manufactured fittings only. Do not use foreign manufactured fittings.
2.2 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Black Steel Pipe: Seamless or ERW, ASTM A 53.
B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.
C. Galvanized Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.
D. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
E. Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 671, A 672, or A 691.
F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting.
G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4.
H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.
I. Unions: ANSI B16.39; 300 lb. ground joint malleable iron, hexagonal, selected by
Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end
connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as
indicated.
J. Dielectric Unions: 175 psig WSP at 250
oF. Equal to Clear Flow Dielectric Waterway
Fittings. Install per manufacturers requirements.
K. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.
L. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following
material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated.
1. Material Group: Group 1.1.
2. End Connections: Buttwelding.
3. Facings: Raised-face.
4. Steel Pipe Flanges For Waterworks Service: AWWA C207.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 4
M. Forged-Steel and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded
reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe.
N. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
O. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use
less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and
where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-
nipples).
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS:
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type K, L (wall thickness) as indicated for each service;
hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated. Do not use Type M piping.
B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.
C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 280.
D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18.
E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
F. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23.
G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26.
I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24.
J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use
in service indicated.
2.4 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401.
B. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74.
C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C 564 and
stainless steel clamp holding band.
D. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; complying with same
standards (ASTM A 74).
E. Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564.
2.5 PLASTIC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D 1785. Schedule 80. Plenum Rated.
B. PVC Fittings:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 5
1. Schedule 80 Socket: ASTM D 2467.
2. Schedule 80 Threaded: ASTM D 2464.
2.6 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: (Only where acceptable.)
A. General: At Installer's option, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be
used for piping systems having operating conditions not exceeding 230oF (110oC),
excluding steam piping, condensing water return to pump, and any other service not
recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, flanged, or threaded methods, and
may also be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections, expansion joints,
expansion compensators, or vibration reducers.
B. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or
shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create
seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts.
Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest
published literature. (Victaulic style 77) For rigid joints (Victaulic "Zero Flex" style 07).
1. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
3. Standard: Enamel coated, options hot dip galvanized.
C. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal
pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having
properties as designated by ASTM D 2000.
1. Water Services: EPDM Grade E, with green color code identification.
2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer.
D. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi.
1. Exposed Locations: Tamper resistant nuts.
E. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging
machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside
diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during
assembly with nuts and bolts.
F. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings.
1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A 53, Type F for 3/4" to 1-1/2"; Type E or S, Grade B for
2" to 20".
4. Steel: ASTM A 234.
G. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 6
1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
H. Specialties:
1. Dielectric couplings. Victaulic Style 47.
I. Grooves: Conform to the following:
1. Standard Steel: Roll grooved.
2. Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606.
J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products
of one of the following:
1. ITT Grinnell Corp.
2. Victaulic Co. of America.
3. Gustin-Bacon
4. Anvil Gruvlok
K. Coordination with Section 23 07 00: Insulation of coupled piping is more difficult and
expensive than is that of welded piping related to couplings, coupling ears, and more
involved support. Where coupled piping is used, include all extra cost in the proposal.
Install such at no additional cost to the owner.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
welding materials.
B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Use no lead bearing
solders in domestic water applications.
1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA.
2. Silver-Lead Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96TS.
C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
1. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for
brazing filler metal materials.
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for
steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or
elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for
exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 7
connectors of the following:
a. Fernco, Inc.
F. Strainers:
1. Y pattern, self cleaning, line size. Armstrong, Bailey, Crane, Fisher, Metraflex,
Mueller, Sarco, Strong, or Yarway.
a. Iron Body, Screwed Ends 2" and Smaller: 250 psig at 425
oF, screen
mesh to suit service.
b. Flanged Iron Body 21/2" and Larger: 125 psig steam pressure rating,
screen mesh to suit service.
2. Basket pattern, Mueller #155 to 30 psi, with quick release flanged lid Mueller
#165 to 175 psi, with bolt on flanged lid.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve permanently- leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and
couplings, but with adequate and accessible union, flanges, etc., for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by
use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16"
misalignment tolerance. Do not cold spring. Store filler weld materials in accordance
with codes.
1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to
drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with
walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and
notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold
piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other clearance to 1/2" where
furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness,
if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation.
Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating
in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not
encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. Provide high point vents,
low point drains with valves and extension to drain for all piping.
C. All piping in mechanical rooms, fan rooms, etc., shall be exposed. Do not conceal or
imbed piping in walls, floors or other structures.
D. Make changes in direction or size with manufactured fittings. Anchor and support piping
for free expansion and movement without damage to piping, equipment or to building.
E. Arrange piping to maintain head room and keep passageways clear.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 8
F. Provide unions at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to facilitate
maintenance.
G. Run full pipe size through shutoff valves, gas cocks, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe
size within three pipe size diameters of final connection to equipment, coils, etc.
H. Erect all piping to insure proper draining. Domestic water, chilled water, and heating
water shall slope down a minimum of 1" per 40 feet towards the drains. Pitch standpipes
down to fire department connections a minimum of 1" per 40 feet. Slope soil, waste,
vent, and roof drain lines in accordance with requirements of Uniform Plumbing Code.
I. On horizontal straight runs of pipe, use eccentric reducers with straight side on top for
water piping.
J. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping in or through transformer vaults and
other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures or above electrical gear
unless authorized and directed. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through
electrical spaces.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:
A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using
sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter.
Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting
manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3
threads exposed.
C. Brazed: Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME
B31.
D. Soldered: Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with
recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and
clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both
tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will
draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint
before it hardens.
E. Welded:
1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.
2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0
oF (-18oC)
where possible, with minimum pipe preheat to 50oF.
b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5
o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and
clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt.
c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe
sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20".
d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 9
cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld.
Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused
metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions.
e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures;
refabricate to comply with requirements.
f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever
branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.
g. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever
branch pipe of size smaller than main pipe is indicated; or install regular
"T" fitting.
F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
G. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves
in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING:
A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials,
and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with
clean water before proceeding with required tests. Flushing shall consist of not less than
six (6) short intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test
each flush for cleanliness. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints,
supports and accessory items.
1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.
B. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with AWWA C601.
C. Clean, flush as above and treat heating and cooling systems in accordance with Sections
chemical treatment. Certify by signature of Contractor and Owner's Representative.
3.4 PIPING TESTS:
A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test
piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control
devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently
but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds
valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure
and time.
1. Required test period is 2 hours.
2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower
Class or pressure rating.
3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less
than 25 psi test pressure.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000 - 10
4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage
is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.
B. Notifications: At least 10 days prior to commencement of required testing, notice shall be
submitted for review. Tests shall be made prior to painting insulating or covering of any
joints and shall be in accordance with ANSI Code for Pressure Piping.
C. Inspections: Contractor to visually inspect piping while under hydrostatic pressure.
Copies of inspection shall be submitted for review. At option of contract, welds not
hydrostatically tested may be x-ray tested.
D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and
re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use
chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
F. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31.
G. Test waste, drain and vent systems in accordance with local plumbing code and these
specifications. Repair failed sections by disassembly and reinstallation.
H. If test procedures in other sections differ from the above, comply with more stringent
requirements.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 1
SECTION 23 2113
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Mechanical Requirements” are a part of the work
described in this section.
B. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings” are a part of the work described
in this section.
C. Other Specification sections related to Insulation, System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing.
1.2 SUMMARY: Work shown on the drawings and required by these specifications including incidental work
classified as "best practices of the trade".
A. Glycol heating water systems.
B. Glycol chilled water systems.
C. Other work as indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of hydronic piping
products and equipment of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Firm with at least 3 years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature.
2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah.
3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all
other work in progress by the Contractor.
4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or
apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical literature indicating source, brand, type, model,
performance characteristics, installation instructions, etc.
B. Record Drawings: See Division 23.
C. Operation And Maintenance Information: Provide information for all equipment including a
comprehensive system operating description. See Section 019113.
D. Instruction Of Owner's Personnel: Participate in specified instruction. See Division 23.
1. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each
piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial
use (substantial completion).
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 2
2. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these
systems.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices.
1. State Boiler and Pressure Vessel Regulations
2. ASME Codes for Boilers and Pressure Vessels
3. State and Local Plumbing and Mechanical Codes
4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code / International
Plumbing Code
5. ASHRAE Handbooks
2.MATERIALS AND METHODS – GLYCOL HEATING WATER, GLYCOL SNOW MELT HEATING
WATER, GLYCOL CHILLED WATER, GLYCOL HEAT RECOVERY WATER:
2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS:
A. Schedule 40 black steel, A-53 with malleable steel threaded fittings up to 2" size and
forged steel welding fittings 2-1/2" and larger. Contractor option to use a grooved joint
system accommodating for additional support and insulation work. Grooved joint system
shall only be used in exposed areas such as mechanical rooms and fan rooms. All piping
in shafts and above ceilings shall be either screwed, flanged, or welded.
1. Rigid type “K” or “L” copper, bronze or dielectric interface.
B. Optional for chilled water over the Gym only. HVAC Water Pipe – PP-R: (Not Approved
for Glycol Heating Water System)
1. Pipe Sizes 8” and smaller: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PP-R resin
meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM
F 2389. The pipe shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that
generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification
from the same raw material. All pipe shall be made in a three layer extrusion
process. Piping shall contain a fiber layer (faser) to restrict thermal expansion.
All pipe shall comply with the rated pressure requirements of ASTM F 2389 and
be not less than 340 psi at 55°F and 100 psi at 180°F. All pipe shall be certified
by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, NSF 61, and ASTM F 2389 or
CSA B137.11. Pipe shall be Aquatherm® Greenpipe®, or Greenpipe® Faser®,
available from Aquatherm, Inc.
2. Any piping installed in a return air plenum and shall be Aquatherm® Advanced
meeting flame and smoke rating of 25 and 50 respectively. Wrap pipe will
insulate with metallic wrap, and seal all joints.
C. Drains And Overflow: Install piping of any size from drains and overflows using type K or
L copper piping with Solder joint type wrought copper of wrought bronze fittings. Drains
and over flows shall be terminated over floor drains or drain funnels adjacent to
equipment. Furnish drains from all pump bases to floor drains.
D. Water Connections: Provide piping and fittings connecting to the domestic water system,
John W. Hart Building November 29, 2018 MEP & Locker Room Remodel
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 3
such as fill lines, makeup water lines, etc., of Type K or L copper tubing with solder joint
type wrought copper or wrought bronze fittings. Copper piping shall be connected to
equipment and steel piping with insulated unions to prevent electrolysis.
2.2 GENERAL SERVICE VALVES: Comply with Section "Valves".
A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 23 General Mechanical Materials and
Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing.
1. Sectional Valves:
a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves.
b. 3" and Larger: Butterfly valves.
2. Shutoff Valves:
a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves.
b. 3" and Larger: Butterfly valves.
3. Drain Valves:
a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves.
4. Check Valves:
a. All Sizes: Swing check valves where space permits, else use wafer type.
b. Pump Discharge: Non-slam, pump discharge check.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: See Section "Valves".
2.4 CIRCUIT BALANCE VALVES:
A. Circuit balance valve for flow balance complying with Section “Valves”.
2.5 VENT VALVES:
A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually.
Use ball valve.
B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically
with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated
for 125 psi, 1/2" NPS inlet and outlet connections.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering vent valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Armstrong Machine Works.
2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
4. Spirax Sarco.
5. Amtrol.
2.6 STRAINERS:
John W. Hart Building November 29, 2018 MEP & Locker Room Remodel
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 4
A. General: Y pattern, self cleaning, line size.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide strainers of
one of the following:
1. Armstrong
2. Watts
3. Moesco
4. Metraflex
5. Spirax Sarco
6. Mueller
C. 2” and Smaller for Copper Pipe: Watts 777 Series, cast bronze body, wye-pattern, 400
psig WSP at 210ºF, 20 mesh 304SS screen, US manufactured threaded connections.
(Addendum #3)
D. 2" and Smaller for Steel Pipe: Watts No. 77S or equal in Armstrong, 250 lb. iron body,
threaded, Y-pattern, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, full size drain connection with ball
valve.
E. 2-1/2" and Larger: Watts No. 77F-125 or equal in Armstrong, 125 lb. iron body, flanged,
Y-Pattern, stainless steel screen, drain connection with ball valve.
F. Basket Type: (for condenser) 150 psig WWP, iron body, flanged ends, stainless steel
basket with 1/8" perforations with bolted/gasketed cover. Bottom tapped drain
connection selection based on Muesco number 165.
2.14 CHILLED WATER METER:
A. Equipment: Provide turbine type meter constructed to comply with all performance and
material standards of AWWA C701, 175 psi working pressure. Bronze housing with
flanged connections with sealed register reading gallons sized for 200 gpm flow rate at
maximum of 5 psi pressure drop with accuracy of 100% ± 1% of flow. Provide with
remote reading type head compatible with Power Logic CM4000.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Sensus – Omni T2
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials
and products are to be installed.
3.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION:
A. Arrange system in a neat, orderly and functional manner. Maintain access around all
equipment. Provide sheeves for all structural penetrations.
B. Plan ahead for seismic restraint and vibration isolation.
C. Verify adequate ventilation for heat producing equipment, watch out for possible freezing
John W. Hart Building November 29, 2018 MEP & Locker Room Remodel
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 5
conditions.
D. Air Vents and Line Drains: Provide air vents at all high points of piping systems with vent
line extended to valve installed in accessible location 5'-0" above the floor, vent line
extended to drain. Provide drain valves at all equipment and at low points in the system,
extend drain lines to drain funnel or floor sink.
E. Provide pressure gauges and thermometers and pressure/temperature plugs as indicated
on the flow diagrams, piping plans and equipment details.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING:
A. General: Install hydronic piping in accordance with Division 23 “General Pipes and
Fittings."
B. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of
both pipes and reducer flush.
C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation
and servicing of valves.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 23 "Hydronic Piping and Specialties."
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS:
A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division 23 "Mechanical Supporting
Devices."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES:
A. Install valves in accordance with Division 23 "Valves."
B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser
serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as
indicated.
C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on
inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Hydronic Terminal Outlet Valves: Install on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and
elsewhere as indicated.
E. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain
equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or
drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain
hydronic piping system.
F. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION COMPENSATION PRODUCTS:
John W. Hart Building November 29, 2018 MEP & Locker Room Remodel
HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113 - 6
A. General: Provide for expansion and contraction of all piping systems with anchors,
guides, loops, expansion joints, grooved joints, etc. Provide one expansion loop for
every 100 feet of pipe or fraction thereof.
3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. General: Connect hydronic piping systems to mechanical equipment as indicated, and
comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install
shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection.
B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with hydronic terminal shut-off valve and
union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent valve on element in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing valves behind
valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatic
temperature control valve with unions on supply line.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES:
A. Balance Valves: At locations shown on drawings.
B. Vent Valves:
1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at
highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains,
branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Automatic Vent Valves: Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic
riser and elsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent
valve, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.
3.10 TESTS:
A. Isolate sections of piping and equipment and pressure test to 175 psi or 1-1/2 times the
maximum potential pressure of the system, but not to exceed the test pressure rating of a
system component.
1. Conduct an air pressure test, using a soap solution to check for leaks. Establish
the pressure, close off the pressure source and let stand for 24 hours. Given
constant temperature, there should be no drop in pressure.
2. After the air test, fill the system with water, raise to test pressure and inspect for
leaks. Repair all leaks. Repeat tests. Report and certify all tests.
B. Test other system components as needed to verify proper assembly and installation.
C. Participate in overall system test and balance work.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500 - 1
SECTION 23 2500
CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FILTERS AND EQUIPMENT
1.GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Types of chemical treatment specified in this section include the following:
1. Glycol Heating Water System.
2. Campus Glycol Chilled Water System.
3. Cleaning and Treatment.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 GLYCOL SYSTEM: Reuse the existing glycol make-up unit(s) serving the revised glycol heating water
and glycol chilled water systems. Verify that the following compositions of glycol solution are used:
A. Glycol:
1. 30% glycol by volume for portion of heating water system related to this project. Inhibited
propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union Carbide.
2. 30% glycol by volume for portion of campus chilled water system related to this project.
Inhibited propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union
Carbide.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 GLYCOL HEATING WATER, CAMPUS GLYCOL CHILLED WATER, AND TREATMENT:
A. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed
to fill, vent and drain system.
B. Flush and clean new and existing systems.
C. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed
to fill, vent and drain system.
1. Use a treatment schedule similar to the following, but to be verified compatible with
system materials.
2. Fill, circulate, drain system, clean strainers. Use clean water.
3. Fill, introduce sodium triphosphate or suitable degreaser, take the water to operating
temperature, circulate for minimum of 5 hours, drain, flush.
4. Fill the revised heating water, and campus chilled water as noted below:
a. Fill heating water systems with new 30% inhibited propylene glycol, Dowfrost HD.
b. Fill chilled water systems including existing piping with 30% inhibited propylene
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500 - 2
glycol, Dowfrost HD. May re-use existing glycol, add additional glycol as
necessary.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 1
SECTION 23 3100
DUCTWORK
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this
section.
B. Types of ductwork required for the project include the following:
1. Round
2. Rectangular
3. Spiral
4. Factory
C. Exterior Insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division-23 sections, and is included as
work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division-23 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork; not work of this
section.
E. Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section.
F. Refer to other Division-23 sections for fans and air handling units; not work of this section.
G. Refer to other Division-23 sections for mechanical controls; not work of this section.
H. Refer to other Division-23 sections for filters; not work of this section.
I. Refer to other Division-23 sections for air control boxes; not work of this section.
J. Refer to other Division-23 sections for system commissioning, testing and balancing; not work of
this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products
of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 2
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience
on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.
1. The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount
to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice
sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for metal ductwork materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including,
but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and
floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spacial relationship between
ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made
to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area,
materials, and rigidity are not reduced.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork
and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials
and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume,
Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of
Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems".
4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all
sections pertaining to mechanical work.
B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and
purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end
damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 3
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 4
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK - GENERAL:
A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by
SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the
ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 edition, Chapter 1, Duct Construction
B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet
steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A 525; mill phosphatized for exposed locations.
C. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in
occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections,
including those which would impair painting. Installation of exposed ductwork shall be laid
out in advance and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung straight and uniform,
points shall be true, seams shall show continuity.
2.2 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION:
A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15
o
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45o lateral and
45o elbows for branch take-off connections. Where 90o branches are indicated, provide
conical type tees.
B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line
radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows
where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and
20o for expanding tapers.
C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent
possible. Refer to Division-23 section "Duct Accessories' for accessory requirements.
D. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner
to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and
adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners.
E. Offset, transition, adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a
coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of
conditions, teardrop around conflicting piping, lights, etc., all at no added cost to the
owner.
2.3 DUCT PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS:
A. For all VAV systems, which include but are not limited to
1. From fan discharge to air terminal unit: medium pressure ductwork, 10" w.g.
2. From fan discharge to low pressure systems 3” wg.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 5
3. Rectangular supply air ductwork from air terminal unit, rectangular and round
ductwork: Low pressure rectangular ductwork, 3" w.g. Low pressure round
ductwork exposed to view spiral backseam, 3" w.g.
4. Outside air ductwork and plenums, 10" w.g.
5. Relief air plenums, 3" w.g.
B. Low pressure exhaust ductwork and ventilation systems, which include but are not
necessarily limited to exhaust fan systems and ventilation systems.
1. Low pressure rectangular ductwork, 3" w.g. Increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e., 20 to
18) for all sizes.
2.4 LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK: (1" SMACNA Pressure Class)
A. Round type ductwork for use on low velocity supply systems (1200 fpm maximum), low
pressure (0.75" maximum duct pressure), shall be fabricated on 26 gauge galvanized
steel sheets with snap-lock longitudinal seams and crimped and beaded joins.
B. All end joints shall have at least three screw fasteners and shall be wrapped airtight.
Transverse and longitudinal seams shall be taped with "Hardcast TA". Elbows and
fittings shall provide smooth air flow patterns and have a neat appearance.
C. Use factory fabricated elbows of the multi-sectional adjustable type.
2.5 LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK: (3" SMACNA Pressure Class)
A. Rectangular ductwork for use on supply systems up to 2" maximum duct static pressure
and 2000 fpm maximum duct velocity shall be constructed of galvanized steel using
construction for nominal 3" SMACNA rated systems. Seal all transverse joints with duct
cement or tape with "Hardcast TA".
B. Use radius elbows or turning vanes with extended trailing edge. Use a true 1-1/2 time 45
o
tapping takeoffs with downstream balance damper.
C. Duct dimensions are inside clear. Increase for acoustical lining.
D. For rectangular exhaust ducts, increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e. 20 to 18) for all sizes. Seal
all joints.
2.6 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK: (10" SMACNA Pressure Class)
A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-
fabricated duct and fittings.
B. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by the
following methods and in minimum gauges listed.
Method of
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 6
Diameter Minimum Gauge Manufacture
3" to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam
15" to 26" 24 Spiral Lockseam
27" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam
37" to 50" 20 Spiral Lockseam
51" to 60" 18 Spiral Lockseam
Over 60" 16 Longitudinal Seam
60" to 84" 18 Spiral Lockseam
Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal seam duct.
C. Round Duct Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide
continuous welds along seams. Mitered elbows shall be of at least 5 piece construction
with R/D ratio of 1.5. All branch takeoffs shall be a true 45º takeoff having an overall
throat width at the main duct connection of 1-1/2 times the sizes of the branch duct.
Diameter Minimum Gauge
3" to 36" 20
38" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
D. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, of
spiral lockseam or longitudinal seam construction, in minimum gauges listed.
Maximum Minimum
Width Gauge Spiral Longitudinal
Under 25" 24 22
25" to 48" 22 20
49" to 70" 20 18
Stiffener Inserts 4'-0" on Center
E. Flat-Oval Duct Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide
continuous weld along seams.
Maximum
Width Minimum Gauge
Under 37" 20
37" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
F. Double wall Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Construct with outer pressure shell, 1"
or 2" thick (as indicated on drawings) insulation layer, and perforated inner liner.
Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, of spiral
lockseam construction, use longitudinal seam for over 59", in minimum gauges listed.
Use where indicated on drawings.
Equivalent to United McGill "Acoustic-K27".
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 7
Nominal Duct
Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner
3" to 12" 26 gauge 24 gauge
13" to 24" 24 gauge 24 gauge
25" to 34" 22 gauge 24 gauge
35" to 48" 20 gauge 24 gauge
49" to 58" 18 gauge 24 gauge
Over 59" 16 gauge 20 gauge
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 8
G. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous weld
along seams of outer shell. Construct fittings to close tolerance with ductwork.
Nominal Duct
Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner
3" to 34" 20 gauge 20 gauge
36" to 48" 18 gauge 20 gauge
Over 48" 16 gauge 20 gauge
H. Field joints shall be made up using an initial coat of 3M EC-750 adhesive wrapping the
joint with a 3" wide fiberglass strip and applying a final seal coat of adhesive to the
fiberglass. Duct sections and fittings shall be held in place at joints with sheet metal
screws 6" on centers. Simple coating of joint surfaces with mastic prior to joining is not
acceptable (SMACNA Std. P.1-11).
As an alternative method of duct joint sealing, the joints shall be held in place with screws
as specified, but the contractor may use "Thermofit" duct sealing bands as manufactured
by Rayclad Tubes of Menlo Park, California. Bands shall be installed according to the
manufacturer's directions. The open flame shall not be used in the vicinity of combustible
materials.
I. Oval ductwork shall be installed where called for on the plans and where required to
conform to tight space requirements encountered during construction. The contractor
shall furnish transition pieces as required. Oval ductwork shall have equivalent capacity
to the round duct.
At the Contractor's option odd inch diameter round ducts may be increased in size to the
next larger even inch providing space considerations are accommodated and all related
conditions are resolved by the contractor.
2.7 FACTORY DUCT:
A. Extent of Work: Provide factory duct at connections to air terminal unit, at points of round
to round flexible connections (see also "Flexible Connections") and at other locations
indicated or required.
B. Prohibited Material: Do not use single wire helix ducting with vinyl or plastic liner of any
type.
C. Factory Duct Non-corrosive Environments: Woven fiberglass fabric impregnated with
vinyl or neoprene clamped in a continual helix of aluminum or cold rolled steel. U.L. listed
for Class 1 duct, compliant with NFPA 90A and 90B, pressure rated to 12" w.g.,
equivalent to:
D. Insulated: Flexmaster Type 4; Thermaflex M-KC
E. Installation: Follow manufacturer’s instructions. Use stainless steel or nylon band
clamping rings. In general, do not use lengths in excess of 3 feet. Make bends only in
long radius format. Support duct to avoid droops and kinks.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 9
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 10
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated
and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with
ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Duct Sealing Compound: Duct sealing compound shall be 3M brand number EC-750 or
Duro-Dyne S-2. This material shall be used in making up duct joints or in water proofing,
caulking plenums, etc.
C. Acoustical Lining: Acoustical lining in ducts shall be 1" thick, 1-1/2 pound density, coated,
flexible glass fiber type, set in adhesive and impaled on weld studs spaced not more than
12" on centers and secured with lock washers. Airstream surface faced with black coated
matte. Acoustical lining shall completely line the ducts. Lining shall have a fire and
smoke hazard rating not exceeding 20-50-50. Owens-Corning, Johns-Manville,
Certainteed.
D. All joints, edges and/or surface breaks in the coating of the acoustical lining shall be
pointed up to a smooth surface with adhesive.
E. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 "Specifications for Adhesives and Duct
Thermal Insulation".
F. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Article
S2.11.
G. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type
applicable for fabrication/ installation detail) as compounded and recommended by
manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in
ductwork.
H. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped
galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK:
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems
rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing
each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork
accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces
smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 11
which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at
every floor.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 12
All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal
ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or
divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be
maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at
project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent
debris and dirt from entering.
B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-
fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts
close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown
for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where
possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever
possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in
mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase
horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with
suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Maintain clearances above of and in front of
electrical panels.
E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are
exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least
1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.
1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide
firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of
Section "Firestopping".
F. Ducts At Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to
or passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry openings and along edges of all
plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" galvanized angle iron which
shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying caulking
compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron. Round high
velocity ducts in vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings. Close
openings between duct and structure.
G. Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross broken on the four sides of
each 4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as
well as 4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross broken. Cross breaking
shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles; the
center of cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 13
H. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil
frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
I. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
1. Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation.
Cap open duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related
installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER:
A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
As indicated on the drawings, supply, return and exhaust air ductwork shall be lined with
acoustical insulation.
In all cases outside air ductwork shall be lined with 2' thick 1-1/2 lb. density acoustical
lining unless indicated differently on drawings, ie. requiring Type 2 plenum.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 3'-0" extended
length. No elbows allowed.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible".
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. It is essential that all ducts shall be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up to
18" in width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers.
Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on not
more than 5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, heavy
supporting angles shall be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall be of
sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at least two
sides of the duct.
B. Construct hangers for rectangular ductwork from galvanized iron l" x 1/16". Hangers shall
extend down the sides of rectangular ducts the full depth of the duct and shall be bent
underneath the duct 2". Hangers shall be secured to the duct using sheet metal screws
or rivets of appropriate sizes on 6" centers, but not less than two screws in the side and
one in the bottom of each hanger.
C. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width construct hangers from galvanized iron
1-1/2" x 1/16". Hangers shall be installed and secured to duct as described in Paragraph
B.
3.6 SUPPORTING DAMPERS: Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 14
supported by reinforcing the ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry the
weight of the dampers and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure, or shall be
supported independent of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the site determine.
3.7 CONNECTIONS: Connections of high velocity supply and exhaust ducts, fittings, and high
velocity mixing boxes shall be made airtight by coating joints with Minnesota Mining Co. Mastic,
Type EC-800, Benjamin Foster, Sheet Metal Products Co., or approved equal, before joining, and
then sealing the joint with one layer of "Glass-Fab" reinforcing tape set in a coating of the above
compound. Tape and sealant shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke development of
50.
3.8 WELDED JOINTS: Welded ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8" steel bar
behind each weld to allow laying of a neat and continuous bead.
3.9 AESTHETIC LAYOUTS: Contractor shall locate all diffusers, grilles and other exposed items in
such a manner as to fit symmetrically in any grid system or other aesthetic architectural or lighting
pattern. Refer to reflected ceiling plans and electrical lighting layouts for additional information.
Provide duct offsets or extensions as required to make a proper installation.
Close or cap all duct ends. Use auxiliary blower with air flow meter to establish a duct pressure
equivalent to the duct pressure class. Inspect all joints in duct system and seal all identifiable
leaks.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is
completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds (that
is, actually blow the suds away) shall be sealed by additional taping and caulking to
reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. Repair leaks and
repeat tests until total leakage conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage
Class 3 for round/oval, 6 for rectangular.
3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION:
A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection
for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or
equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.
3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: Before the ceilings are installed,
with filters in place, operate the fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris from ducts.
If it is not practical to use the main supply blower for this test, the ducts may be blown out
in sections by a portable fan.
B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration
of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint
deterioration.
C. Balancing:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK 23 3100 - 15
1. Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution
balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. However, the Sheet Metal
Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal any leaks in ductwork that
become apparent in balancing process.
2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment
performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor
and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified
conditions.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1
SECTION 23 3300
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:
1. Dampers.
a. Control dampers.
2. Turning vanes.
3. Duct hardware.
4. Duct access doors.
5. Flexible connections.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories;
not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories,
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 3 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork
accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork
accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and
methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of
duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 2
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction
of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased products
from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and
moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from weather. Where necessary
to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL DAMPERS:
A. Control dampers are furnished by the Mechanical Control Section but installed by this Section.
Dampers shall be supported, plenum openings shall be reinforced, the entire assembly shall be
sturdy and operate smoothly. Install dampers to direct outside and return air into each other for
mixing
2.2 TURNING VANES: Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be single
blade. Turning vane spacing shall be per SMACNA. Each blade shall be tack welded or crimped to the
carrier frame to prevent rattling.
2.3 DUCT HARDWARE:
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for
the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct
test holes, cover, for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided and
installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft;
and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended
quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. (Bare
duct - Ventlok 620, 635; Insulated duct - Ventlok 627, 628, 637, 638, 629.)
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the
following:
1. Ventfabrics, Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 3
2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: Doors shall be 2" narrower than the duct width by 24" up to a maximum of 24"
x 24". Duct access doors shall be furnished for all fire damper links, manual controllers and adjustable
balancing devices. Duct access doors for all ductwork (except low pressure ductwork) shall be: Bolted
access door, oval shaped constructed of an outer door connected to a an inner plate by spring loaded
carriage bolts with wing handles. Inner plate to have cellular spounge gasket for leak free operation up to
20"wg. The door shall have permanently bonded polyester insulation.
2.5 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS: Wall and ceiling doors at fire dampers and smoke dampers
shall be the same as specified in Section 23 00 00. Doors shall be sized for easy access to fire links and
not less than 24" x 24" where possible.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Extent of Work: Provide flexible connections between ductwork or plenums and equipment,
such as at fan inlets and discharges, and at other places indicated on the drawings or called
for by note or specification.
B. Non-Corrosive Environment or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven glass
fabric double coated with neoprene or hypalon equivalent to “Ventglas” for interior locations
and “Ventlon” for exterior locations, fabric not less than 3-1/4" wide clamped between strips of
24 gauge galvanized iron. Material by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
C. Corrosive Environments or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven fiberglass
fabric coated with Teflon equivalent to “Ventel” by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
By nature, the material is slippery and requires rigid clamping in the field installation. Install
with the coated side to the corrosive air stream. Clamp the material into a stainless steel
edging or hinge with a folded fabric edge. Be careful in securing the clamped fabric to the fan
or duct as to not penetrate or disturb any protective coatings or surfaces.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,
with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended
function.
B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air
systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from
either side, except outside only where duct is to small for person to enter.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
ductwork accessories properly with other work.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 4
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as
required to obtain proper operation and leak proof performance.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire
dampers and adjust for proper action.
1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 section "Mechanical
Identification".
2. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched
surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 - 1
SECTION 23 3423
POWER VENTILATORS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
C. See Section 23 05 13 Motors, Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of power and gravity ventilator work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of power and gravity ventilators specified in this section include the following:
1. Power ventilators.
a. In-line Exhaust Fans
C. Refer to Division 23 section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" for balancing of power and gravity
ventilators; not work of this section.
D. Refer to Division 23 temperature control systems sections for control work required in conjunction
with power and gravity ventilators; not work of this section.
E. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring between ventilators; and between ventilators and field-installed control
devices as shown in Division 26.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power and gravity
ventilators, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power and gravity ventilators, including
specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and
installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions,
construction details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring
to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed
and portions to be field-installed.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and
gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings,
and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division
23.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated
in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are listed by UL and have UL
label affixed.
3. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with
NEMA standards.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 SQUARE IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL TYPE EXHAUST FANS (EF-2 & EF-3):
A. Extent of Work: Furnish and install required direct driven centrifugal square in-line type
fans, complete with fan, motor, inlet and discharge flanges.
B. General: Fans shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fans shall bear the
AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.
C. Construction: Each fan shall be of bolted construction utilizing corrosion resistant
fasteners. Housing shall be minimum 18 gauge steel with integral duct collars. Bolted
access doors shall be provided on three sides, sealed with closed cell neoprene gaskets.
Housing shall be pre-drilled to accommodate universal mounting feet for vertical or
horizontal installation. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate
shall indicate design CFM and static pressure
D. Coating: All steel components shall be painted with enamel primer and then a final coat
of gray enamel.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423 - 3
E. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a
precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic
aluminum inlet cone. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-
05, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
F. Motor (EC): Motor shall be an electronically commutated motor rated for continuous duty
and furnished with internally mounted potentiometer speed controller.
G. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the specifications provide
equipment from one of the following manufacturers.
1. Acme
2. Cook
3. Pace
4. Greenheck
5. Penn
6. Jenn-Fan
7. Twin City Fans
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators are to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing: After installation ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to
demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified. When
possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 1
SECTION 23 3616
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
1.GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air terminals work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and
by requirements of this section.
B. Types of air terminals specified in this section include the following:
1. Air Control Valves
a. Single Duct VAV Cooling with H.W. Heating.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for external insulation of air terminals; not work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting and balancing of air terminals; not work
of this section.
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for temperature controls for air terminals; not work of this
section.
F. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air terminals. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of air terminals with
characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.
1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to
cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet
metal workers with additional certification for welders.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance data for
each size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation, room
location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and installation and
start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control components,
clearly indicating required field electrical connections.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal; including
"trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and
maintenance data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 93.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in accordance
with ARI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear ARI certification seal.
2. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thermal insulations
complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
3. Uniform Building Code/Uniform Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections pertaining to
mechanical work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on outside
of container type of air terminal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and
prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes.
B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.
Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose
with waterproof wrapping.
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Under the Base Bid which requests a Direct Digital Control System, a VAV box controller is
required which can provide a non-pneumatic, pressure independent, controls sequence.
1. Fit boxes with volume and temperature sensors and DDC controls, see Division 23
Controls.
2. Box capacity shall be equivalent to that scheduled.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of one of the
following:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 3
1. Titus
2. Krueger
3. Price
2.3 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME COOLING WITH HW HEATING (VAVR):
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminal as indicated, selected with
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on the schedule.
Vendor/Contractor to verify count and arrangement.
B. Construction: Factory fabricate VAV damper and heating coil into a single cabinet. Cabinet shall
be of 22 gauge or heavier galvanized steel with a 1" thick acoustical lining. VAV damper shall be
of air-tight, quarter turn design with shaft supported in sintered bronze or nylon bearings. Design
with extension plenum, with access door ahead of coil for coil inspection and cleaning.
C. Controls: Reference Section 230923.
D. Heating Coils: Capacity and size as scheduled. Coils minimum 1 row, 10 FPI, with 2 row, 8 FPI
provided where capacity dictates.
1. Fins: Corrugated plate sheet aluminum, 0.01" sheet thickness minimum.
2. Tubes:
a. 1 Row Coils: Copper tube 1/2" diameter, 0.035” tube, 0.049” bend wall
thickness, expand tube into fins.
b. 2 Row Coils: Copper tube, 5/8" diameter, 0.035" tube, 0.049" bend wall
thickness, expand tube into fins.
3. Headers: Seamless Type K or L copper tube headers and return bends, brazed
connections.
4. Casings: Construct of 16 gauge continuous coated galvanized steel with fins recessed into
channels to minimize air bypass.
5. Testing: Air tested under water to 175 psig.
6. The successful supplier shall include as part of the submittal, computer generated capacity
data for each coil. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in
accordance with ARI 410.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Titus
2. Krueger
3. Price
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3616 - 4
A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other work; and
maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no case less than that
recommended by manufacturer. Protect electrical clearances. Protect access to controls.
C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 23
ductwork sections.
D. Seismic Restraint: Provide 3-dimensional restraint for all suspended boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air
terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.
B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and
retest to demonstrate compliance.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturers touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR FILTERS 234116 - 1
SECTION 234116
AIR FILTERS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air cleaning work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this section include the following:
1. Filter Holding Systems.
a. Factory fabricated for factory fabricated air handlers.
2. Air Filters.
a. Replaceable (throwaway).
b. Extended surface self-supporting.
3. Filter Gages.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air cleaning
equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions,
weights, required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure
drop at rated air flow, efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for filter rack
assemblies indicating dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter
and rack required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR FILTERS 234116 - 2
1. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety performance of
air filter units.
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for
method of testing, and for recording and calculating air flow rates.
3. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to test
and performance of air filter units.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR FILTERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, replaceable filter media and
holding frames shall be a product of one of the following:
1. American Air Filter
2. Continental
3. Farr
4. Flanders/Eco Air
B. Holding Frames: Suitable for filters specified.
1. Field fabricated for built-up system - 14-gauge aluminum minimum. Provide
stiffening pieces as required to with stand 10" pressure differential. Fasteners
shall be stainless steel.
2. Filter bank sizes as shown on drawings.
C. Type 1: Replaceable pleated media type filters.
1. Pleated, medium efficiency in a cardboard holding frame, 2" or 4" thick as
scheduled, 0.32" s.p. maximum initial pressure drop at 500 feet/minute, to
change out at 0.50". U.L. Class 2, 25-30% efficiency, 90-95% arrestance per
ASHRAE Standard 52-76.
2. Equivalent to Farr 30/30.
D. Type 2: Replaceable minipleat 80-85% efficiency.
1. High efficiency V-bank with an ASHRAE MERV Efficiency rating of 13, extended
surface low pressure drop, minipleat filters.
2. Filter sizes and capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
3. Final filters shall consist of minipleat panels. Each panel shall be constructed of
moisture resistant microfine fiberglass media with polyurethane bead separators
or comparable quality of construction.
4. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.30” at 500 FPM.
5. Media area must equal or exceed that of the specified filter.
6. The average efficiency shall be as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999
test methods.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR FILTERS 234116 - 3
7. Filters shall be UL Class 2 listed.
8. Equivalent to Flanders “Super Flow-V” or Farr “Durafil 4V”.
E. Filter Gauges:
1. Magnehelic Gauge 0-1" range for flat filters, 0-3" range for high efficiency rigid or
lag filters, other gauges to match filter range.
2. Furnish with mounting bracket, pressure tips, tubing vent/zero valves.
F. Startup Set:
1. Install a set of Type 2 filters immediately upon fabrication of any filter bank.
Install scheduled set of filters at completion of construction at the time of testing
and balancing. Second set for replacement at the end of the job.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter housings will be installed.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these
specifications pertaining to air filters housing/casings, and associated supporting devices.
B. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance
with air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to
ensure that filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Filter to be
positioned so as air flow pushes filter into frame.
C. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation to other work. Position
unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding
frames securely to substrate, with spring attachment, provide second spring attachment
and seal assembly to fasten prefilter to face of final filter.
D. A vertical galvanized metal strip 2" wide and of a gauge equal to the filter frame shall be
installed between each and every filter column to increase bank rigidity.
E. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to
interface installation of filters properly with other work.
F. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
G. Install air filter gage pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air
pressure drop through air filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter
plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages if any, for proper readings.
H. Install 1" sheetmetal strip in bottom of each filter frame. Sheetmetal strip to have
upturned ends to allow for easy removal of filter media.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
AIR FILTERS 234116 - 4
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air
leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting.
3.4 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Provide two sets of filters: one for start-up/balancing use; the second for replacement at
the end of the job.
END OF SECTION 234116
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 1
SECTION 23 7300
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS
1.GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To
1. Furnish and install packaged modular air handling units as described in Contract Documents.
B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section
1. Three way control valve
C. Related Sections
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, fan capacities, fan performance, motor electrical
characteristics, casing construction details, wiring interconnections, gauges, and finishes of
materials.
2. Indicate filter sizes and quantities, and filter frames.
3. Provide coil selection work sheets showing proper consideration for altitude, air density, and
fouling factor.
4. Manufacturer installation instructions.
5. Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
6. Sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions.
7. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare
parts list, and wiring diagrams.
B. Record Documents
1. Show unit configuration in direction of air flow.
2. Indicate assembly and unit dimensions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification Requirements
1. Certify air handling unit capacity, static pressure, fan speed, brake horse power, and selection
procedures in accordance with AMCA 210 and ASHRAE Standard 51
2. Certify air coils capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI
410-87.
3. Certify sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air handlers to site on factory-installed 5 or 6 inch high base rail.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials - In addition to construction set, provide one additional set pleated media
filters for each air handler.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 2
2.PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU-100, 200, 300 & 400)
A.Each air handling unit shall be knockdown construction and field assembled. Provide each
air handling unit with a factory installed airflow monitoring station. The airflow monitoring
station shall be either Ebtron or Air Monitor-Electroflow.
B. Casing
1. Walls and roof 2” double wall construction.
a. Panels of standing seam construction with smooth flush exterior bolted
together. Sealed with continuous bead of silicone caulking applied between the
matching panel seams prior to assembly, and final bead following assembly on
both the interior and exterior panel seams.
b. Air handling unit’s walls, roof, base etc. shall be fully powdered coated. Gray or
White color.
c. Walls constructed of 2 inches thick double wall acoustical thermal panels.
d. Interior walls - Minimum 18 gage perforated or solid galvanized steel.
e. The entire unit housing shall have no visible deflection when exposed to a
differential pressure equal to 1.5 times the point of maximum pressure
differential in the unit housing. The casing shall be certified to have a leakage
rate of less than 1% of the rated air flow quantity at a maximum pressure equal
to 1.5 times the maximum differential pressure between the interior and exterior
of the unit housing.
2. Insulate sections handling conditioned air with 4 inches thick 3 lb / cu ft double density
matt faced fiberglass covered with inner panel of 18 gauge minimum perforated
galvanized steel. Install insulation using adhesive. Insulation edges shall be
protected with metal lagging.
3. For routine service access, supply unit with full height, galvanized, double wall,
thermally broken, hinged, access doors.
a. 16 gage steel exterior and 22 gage solid metal interior liner.
b. Continuously welded corners on doors.
c. Insulation as specified above.
d. Provide two heavy duty (Similar to Ventlock – 310) latches operable from either
side of door.
e. Doors shall be fully gasketed with continuous 1/2 inch closed cell hollow, round,
black gasket with metal encapsulated reinforced backing mechanically fastened
to door frame.
f. Door frames and jambs shall be extruded aluminum with continuously welded
corners.
g. Provide tool operated safety latch on all fan section access doors. Latch to
comply with Title 8 Cal-Osha, ETL and mechanical protection requirements of
UL 1995.
h. Provide doors with thermal pane wire glass viewing windows. Minimum
window size 9” x 9”.
4. Base shall be constructed from tubular structural steel 5 or 6 inch minimum around
perimeter of unit with intermediate tubular steel supports. Powder coated.
a. 16 gage plate shall be installed on base.
b. Floor shall be flat, reinforced from below with seams continuously welded.
c. Provide base with lifting lugs.
d. Insulate base with four inch thick insulation 3 pound density insulation, sheeted
with 22 gage galvanized steel liner.
e. Provide auxiliary and condensate drain pans of 16 gauge 304 stainless steel
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 3
double bottom construction with welded corners. Manufacturer's standard
insulation sandwiched between pan layers.
f. Drain connections shall terminate at side of unit. Provide drain connections on
accessible side of the air handling unit.
C. Fans
1. Fan Array Units
a. The Multiple Fan Array shall consist of multiple direct-driven, non-overloading
plenum fans designed and constructed specifically for Multiple Fan Array
applications that are AMCA certified for performance. Maximum fan wheel
diameter shall be 22 inches. All fan wheels shall be minimum Class III
aluminum construction.
b. Fans: Selected to deliver design air flow at the specified operating Total Static
Pressure at the specified motor speed as scheduled in the Plans. The Multiple
Fan Array shall be selected to operate at a system Total Static Pressure that
does not exceed 90 percent of the specified fan’s peak static pressure
producing capability at the specified fan speed. Fans shall be AMCA 99-208
Class III construction.
c. Motors: Inverter-duty, Premium-efficiency TEFC or TEAO T-frame motors
selected at the voltage, frequency, and rpm as scheduled and shall meet the
requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 30 & 31, section 4.2. Motors shall be
manufactured by Baldor, Siemens or Toshiba. Motors shall be available in ½
HP increments as nameplate HP ratings from 1.5 HP through 12 HP. All motors
shall include permanently sealed bearings. Motor bearings shall be electrically
isolated from motor housing.
d. Each fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA
standard 204-96, for fan application class BV-5, to meet or exceed a rotational
imbalance Grade .55, producing a maximum rotational imbalance of .022” per
second peak, filter in (.55mm per second peak, filter in). “Filter in” measurement
indicates that the specified balance grade must be achieved at the submitted
design operating speed for the fan(s). Fan and motor assemblies submitted for
approval incorporating larger that 215T frame shall be balanced in three
orthogonal planes to demonstrate compliance with the G.55 requirement with a
maximum rotational imbalance of .022” per second peak filter in (.55 mm per
second peak, filter in)
1) Vibration Measurements: Taken on each fan bearing in the horizontal,
vertical and axial directions. During balancing, the fan shall be imposed
with an operating resistance equal to the design external static pressure.
2) Certificate of Compliance: Provide a Certificate of Compliance signed by
the manufacturer and incorporated into the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
e. Motor Bearings: Pre-lubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-
block type with a rated L-10 life of 200,000 hours according to ABMA 9.
f. Fan/motor assembly Access: Removable through the fan section access door
without disassembling the Fan/motor Assembly.
g. Multiple fan installations must have a minimum of scheduled number of fans.
The individual motor size shall not exceed 10.0 horsepower.
h. Backdraft Dampers: Each fan cell must be provided with an integral back flow
prevention device that prohibits recirculation of air in the event a fan, or multiple
fans, become disabled. The system effect static pressure loss for the
submitted back flow prevention device shall be added to the scheduled TSP to
determine the revised fan TSP for fan selection purposes, and shall be
indicated as a separate line item SP loss in the submitted fan selection data. If
the new TSP value results in larger electrical requirements than scheduled, the
AHU manufacturer & its rep shall be responsible for any & all additional costs
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 4
associated with the increased electrical requirements.
i. Electrical Control Panel:
1) Each Fan/motor Assembly shall be individually wired to an Electrical
Control Panel that provides overload protection, short circuit protection
and a manual disconnect for each individual fan/motor assembly. Factory
wire each Fan/Motor Assembly to an individual Variable Frequency Drive
that is mounted directly at the individual fan cell or motor. Wire all
circuits to a common main panel terminal block for a single point
connection of power to the Air Handling Unit.
2) Code Compliance: Electrical designs, wiring and hardware in accordance
with the current NEC, UL 508C and local codes. Electrical Control Panel
shall be rated NEMA 1 Indoor.
3) Label and Listing: Control Panel shall be listed and labeled by UL, CSA
or ETL. Air Handling Units not listed and labeled at the factory shall be
inspected and labeled by a certified UL/CSA/ETL representative in the
field at the manufacturer’s expense.
4) Location: Mounted on the exterior of the air handler.
5) Auxiliary Contacts: Provide contacts for alarm connections to the
Building Management System.
6) Label and number code all wiring and electrical devices in accordance
with the unit electrical diagram.
7) Control and Lighting Power: Provide control and lighting transformers
wired to the common main panel terminal block for a single-point
electrical connection for the air handling unit.
8) Provide a PLC (programmable logic controller) with an operator interface
panel & display to allow control of the fan array VFDs from a control input
signal supplied by the BAS/ATC system based on control of duct static
pressure, air volume or building static pressure. The operator interface
panel & display shall be able to display each individual fan cell’s
operating conditions including air volume, TSP & KW. If the fan array
manufacturer or VFD manufacturer cannot provide this controller, it could
be provided, installed & fully commissioned by the BAS/ATC contractor
at the expense of the AHU manufacturer at no additional cost to the
owner form the original bid price for the project.
j. Manufacturers:
1) Huntair.
2) Temtrol
3) Governaire
D. Variable Frequency Drives
1. The Variable Frequency Drives shall be sized accordingly to start and hold respective
motors in the Fanwall. Provide short circuit protection for each drive through means of
using fuses with fuse blocks or circuit breakers.
2. The Variable Frequency Drives shall be mounted in a dedicated enclosure for connection
to single point power. Variable Frequency Drive enclosure shall be provided with a main
disconnecting means. Provide appropriate cooling of enclosure.
3. Motor circuit protectors shall be used for each motor in the Fanwall array. Motor circuit
protectors shall be housed and mounted in the VFD enclosure as required. Motor circuit
protectors may be mounted in a remote enclosure that is separate from VFD enclosure if
design requires. Variable frequency drive enclosure and remote Motor circuit protector
enclosure must be mounted at a minimal distance from fan array motors and each other.
4. Provide three phase power distribution wiring and control wiring as required. All three
phase power components shall have a rating listed for Short Circuit Current Rating.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 5
Provide control wiring and components required for complete operation of fan wall
system. System controls, controls components and control wiring shall include but is not
limited to Auto mode or manual mode, CFM control mode, or BMS control mode. Controls
and control wiring shall include auto start/stop, manual start stop, life safety shutdown,
smoke shutdown, system alarms and VFD alarms. All control wiring shall be included in
VFD enclosure provided with system.
E. Coils
1. Provided by same company as supplier of air handling units and designed with
aluminum plate fins and copper tubes, with stainless steel casings.
2. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled, and firmly bonded to tubes with mechanical
expansion of tubes. Fins shall be minimum 0.01" sheet thickness.
a. Soldering or tinning shall not be used in bonding process.
b. Mount coils in unit casing to be accessible for service and can be removed from
unit through side or top.
c. Capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedure shall be certified in
accordance with ARI Standard 410.
3. Provide factory installed extended drain and vent connections for water coils. Provide
with factory installed intermediate 304 stainless steel drain pans between coil
sections.
4. Water Cooling Coils -
a. Enclosed in insulated coil section.
b. Coil headers and U-bends shall not be exposed.
c. Water flow counter to air flow.
d. Proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure under water.
e. Round copper pipe headers.
f. 5/8 inch outside dimension tubes with minimum 0.035 inch wall thickness.
0.049" bend wall thickness.
g. Add ball type drain and vent valves to each header in field.
h. Coordinate coil connections with Drawings for access.
5. See Specification Section 238216.
F. Filters
1. Provide factory fabricated flat filter section of same construction and finish as unit
casing with filter guides and hinged, double wall access doors with automotive style
gasket for minimum leakage for filter removal.
2. See Specification Section 234116.
3. Filter Gauges -
a. Magnahelic gauges accurate to plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
b. Provide probes and shut off valves with each gauge.
c. Pipe so gage can read drop across each filter bank.
d. Approved Manufacturer And Model - Series 2000 by Dywer
G. Dampers
1. Externally mounted outside air and return air.
a. Air foil design and aluminum construction.
b. Parallel blade type with metal compressible jamb seals and extrude vinyl blade
edge seals on all blades.
c. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings.
d. 60 inch maximum bumper blade length.
e. Extend damper shafts minimum 6 inches outside of unit cabinet for mounting of
damper operators. Provide nylon bearings where shaft penetrates cabinet.
f. Maximum Leakage Rates -
1) 4 cfm/square foot at 4 inches Wg.
g. Approved Manufacturer And Model -
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 6
1) Ruskin - CD50
H. Main unit Electrical Panel and Wiring
1. The Air Handling Unit shall have an electrical control panel that shall include the
variable frequency drives with necessary fusing and or overload protection. The Air
handling unit shall be factory wired requiring only field wiring of main power to the line
side of the main power disconnect.
I. Lighting
1. Provide vapor proof service light fixture in each accessible section; wire to a common
switch located adjacent to a fan access door. Lights factory-wired to separate junction
box, to field connection of separate 120 volt circuit.
J. Sound Power Levels
1. The sound power level at the air handling unit discharge, air intake, return air and/or
OSA intake, and casing radiated not to exceed the values shown below, when the unit
is operating at maximum design airflow and static pressure. The sound power levels
are derived from data collected on representative fans shall be calculated in
accordance with AMCA Standard No. 300.
2. Maximum octave band sound power level, DB RE 10E-12 watts.
3. Provide sound power data for AHU’s
K. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers
1. Huntair
2. Temtrol
3. Governaire
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate draw-through type air handling units suitable for scheduled air pressure operation.
B. Fabricate units with supply fan sections, coil sections, and filter section.
C. Permanently join flanged panel surfaces and seal.
D. Turn wall and roof seams inward to provide clean, flush exterior finish.
E. Seal panel seams during assembly to produce airtight unit.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configuration in
accordance with Contract Documents.
B. On units not shipped fully assembled, tag each section to indicate location in direction of
airflow to facilitate assembly at job site.
C. Base performance on altitude conditions.
3.EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install vibration isolation pads under mounting rail at load points indicated by
unit manufacturer. Size shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
PACKAGED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 23 7300 - 7
B. Level unit.
C. Provide each drain connection with deep seal trap and pipe all connections to drain.
D. Provide drain valve on each coil drain fitting and vent valve on each coil vent.
E. Thoroughly seal and calk pipe and conduit penetrations to casing.
F. Seal floor penetrations.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Check and align access doors to ensure smooth operation.
B. At start-up, check each fan motor for rotation and amp draw for each phase. Mark reading
on fan scroll.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan
has been test run under observation.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 1
SECTION 238200
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Motors Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Systems, General
Mechanical Requirements, and General Pipes and Fittings sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
1. Fan Coil Units: heating water, chilled water.
B. Extent of air-handling unit work is indicated on drawings, schedules, and by requirements
of this section.
C. Refer to other Division-23 sections for hot and chilled water, and condensate drain piping
required in conjunction with packaged air handling units.
D. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory-installed.
2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between
equipment and field-installed control devices shown on electrical drawings.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements
of Division-26 sections:
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control
panels.
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division-23 for Automatic
Temperature Controls is work of that section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 2
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fan coil
packaged units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience
on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for fan coil units showing
dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly
indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, required
clearances, construction details, and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring
to air handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed
and portions to be field-installed.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for
lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include
this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in
accordance with requirements of Division 230593.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCA
standards.
2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430
"Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on
units of certified models.
3. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame
spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and
complying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems".
4. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable
to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of air
handling units.
5. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all
sections pertaining to mechanical work.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 3
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver fan coil units in factory-fabricated protective containers.
B. Handle fan coil units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to
air-handling unit manufacturer.
C. Store fan coil units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof
wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VERTICAL FAN COIL UNIT (FCU-1 THRU FCU-5):
A. General Description
1. Indoor fan coil units shall include filters, supply fans, chilled water coil, hot water coil, and
unit controls.
2. Unit shall have a draw-through supply fan configuration and discharge air vertically.
3. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the chilled water coil,
leak testing of the hot water coil, and run testing of the supply fans and factory wired
electrical system. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit.
4. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution
areas for safety and to assist service personnel.
5. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, electrical and controls
components.
6. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.
7. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be
affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.
8. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the
unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.
B. Construction
1. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact
resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.
2. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 6.25. Foam insulation
shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance
with ASTM D1929-11 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F.
3. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Sealing
shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air
leakage. Piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to
reduce air leakage.
4. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a
thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture
accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer
through the panel and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 4
5. Access to filters shall be through hinged access door with quarter turn fasteners.
6. Access to cooling coil shall be through hinged access door with lockable quarter turn
handles.
7. Access to heating coil shall be through hinged access door with lockable quarter turn
handles.
8. Access to internal control panel shall be through an access door with removable pin
hinges and lockable quarter turn handles
9. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry.
10. Access to supply fan shall be through removable access panels on the top and bottom of
the unit.
11. Removable access panels and supply duct flanges shall be interchangeable.
12. Units with a cooling coil shall include sloped 304 stainless steel drain pan. Drain pan
connection shall be on the right hand side of unit with a 1" MPT fitting.
13. Cooling coil shall be mechanically supported above the drain pan by multiple supports
that allow drain pan cleaning and coil removal.
C. Electrical
1. Unit shall be provided with an internal control panel with separated low and high voltage
control wiring.
2. Unit shall be provided with standard power block for connecting power to the unit.
3. Unit shall include a factory installed 24V control circuit transformer.
D. Supply Fans
1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.
2. Blower and motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced.
3. Motor shall be a high efficiency electronically commutated motor (ECM).
4. Motor Blower and motor assembly shall utilize neoprene gasket.
5. ECM driven supply fan CFM set point shall be set with factory installed potentiometer
within the control compartment.
E. Cooling Coil
1. Chilled Water Cooling Coil
a. Coil shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and be hydrogen or
helium leak tested.
b. Coil shall be designed and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be
sine wave rippled.
F. Heating Coil
1. Hot Water Heating Coil
a. Coil shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and be hydrogen or
helium leak tested.
b. Coil shall be designed and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be
sine wave rippled.
c. Coil shall have half serpentine circuitry, 1 row and 12 fins per inch.
G.Filters (FCU1 & 2)
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 5
1. Unit shall include 4-inch-thick, pleated panel filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and
MERV rating of 8, upstream of the cooling coil.
2. Unit shall include a clogged filter switch.
3. Unit shall include factory installed Magnehelic gauge measuring the pressure drop across
the filter rack.
H. Controls
1. Unit shall be provided with a remote mount control panel with separated low and high
voltage control wiring and a hinged service access door with tooled entry.
I. Manufacturer
1. Aaon
2.2 FLOOR MOUNT VERTICAL FAN COIL UNIT (FCU-6 THRU FCU-9):
A. Vertical, exposed, floor mounted shall consist of coils, drain pan assembly filter and
centrifugal fan with drive mounted in a common cabinet for independent air delivery from
a single unit. Units are complete except for controls. Provide with seismic stand for field
connection of return air. Provide rubber in shear isolations. 1” duct collar air supply and
return.
B. All unit chassis shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel for structural stability
and product durability. All exterior panels shall be insulated with 1/2" thick fiberglass with
a maximum k value of .24 (BTU • in) / (hr • ft2 • °F) and rated for a maximum air velocity
of 3600 f.p.m. Insulation shall conform to UL 181 for erosion and NFPA 90A for flame
spread (25) and smoke developed (50) rating per ASTM E-84 and UL 723.
C. Provide separate heating and cooling with capacities as indicated on drawings. Refer to
Division 23 for heating and cooling coil specification. Cooling coils do not need to be
drainable. All coils shall be specifically designed and circuited for water use. All coils shall
be tested at 300 PSI.
D. Fans shall be forward curved, centrifugal blower type fans. The fan shaft shall be
supported by a permanently lubricated bearing. All fans shall be dynamically balanced.
E. All drain pans are constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel with welded seams, powder-
coated epoxy with 1/4" closed cell insulation.
F. Filters shall be provided on all units. Filters shall be one inch MERV 8 type. Filter access
shall be from the front of the unit via a hinged access door with securing clips.
G. Motors shall be ECM type with adjustable speed control.
H. Manufacturer:
1. Magic Aire
2. Enviro-Tec
3. Trane
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FAN COIL UNITS, CABINET HEATERS AND UNIT HEATERS:
A. General: Install fan coil units where indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices,
to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, piping, and electrical as necessary to interface
installation of other work.
C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to
be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to
Electrical Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed
with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment
installer.
D. Piping Connections: Refer to Division-23 HVAC sections. Provide piping, valves,
accessories, gages, supports, and flexible connectors as indicated.
E. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for fan coil unit components.
F. Coil Condensate Drain Trap: Provide coil condensate drain line each fan coil unit
condensate drain pan.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air-handling units, start-up and operate
equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
B. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance
or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his
subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,
vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS 238200 - 7
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish
materials furnished by manufacturer.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each fan coil unit. Install new filters at
completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing
work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.
END OF SECTION 238200
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216 - 1
SECTION 238216
HEATING AND COOLING COILS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of heating and cooling coil work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
1. Heating coils.
2. Chilled water coils.
C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for piping and testing, adjusting and balancing of coils,
not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units,
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for coils showing dimensions,
capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and
installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions,
construction details, and field connection details.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating and maintenance instructions and
spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings in maintenance manuals;
in accordance with requirements of Section 23 01 00.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216 - 2
1. ARI Compliance: Provide coil ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 410
"Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils".
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33
"Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils".
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Handle coils and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring.
Do not install damaged coils or components; replace with new.
B. Store coils and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal
units, and moving them to final location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEATING AND COOLING COILS:
A. General: Provide coils of size and in location indicated, and of capacities and having
performance data as scheduled. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection
procedures in accordance with ARI 410.
B. Fins: Corrugated plate sheet aluminum, maximum fins per inch as scheduled, 0.01"
sheet thickness minimum.
C. Tubes: Copper tube, 5/8" diameter, 0.035" tube wall thickness and 0.049" bend wall
thickness, expand tube into fins.
D. Headers: Seamless Type K or L copper tube headers, vented with intermediate row and
(headers fully drainable for chilled water coils provide ½” threaded connection at bottom
of each header and 1/2” threaded vent connection at top of each header, see detail on
drawings.) return bends, brazed connections, threaded steel pipe connections. Add ball
type drain and vent valves to each header in field.
E. Casings: Construct of 16-ga continuous coated galvanized steel with fins recessed into
channels to minimize air bypass.
F. Each coil section shall be furnished with a tapered frame, pitched towards the headers to
facilitate draining.
G. Testing: Air tested under water to 175 psig.
H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide coils of one of the
following:
1. Temtrol.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216 - 3
2. USA Coil
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216 - 4
2.2 COIL DRAIN PANS:
A. Coil Drain Pans: Provide drain pans between each coil and under the entire coil bank,
extend lower pan into basin. Construct all pans of 16 gauge 304 or 316 stainless steel.
The lower pan shall be at least 6" deep, sloped to drain, hold coil high enough to create a
6" trap off of the lower drain pan(s). Set coil into pans to catch all drips. Refer to
drawings for additional detail.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF COILS:
A. General: Install coils as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Chilled Water and Heating Water Coils:
1. Mount coils on steel supports to form banks or stacks as indicated, brace, secure
to air intake chamber. Place in location to permit installation of bypass damper if
required, provide steel baffles where required to prevent bypassing of air.
2. Pitch coil casings for drainage, not less than 1/8" toward return connections,
except where drainage feature is included in coil design.
3. Each bank of cooling coils shall be supported off of floor of sufficient height to
allow installation of condensate trap to allow drainage of condensate from pan
when installed on suction side of fan.
4. Provide for each heating water, chilled Water or glycol heat recovery water, coil
unit, water supply, return connection, strainer, valves, strainer, automatic
temperature regulating valve, balancing valve, etc as indicated.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,
vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish
materials furnished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 238216
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 1
SECTION 26 0501
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. General electrical system requirements and procedures.
2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in
Contract Documents.
3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections.
4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described
in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal
requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide following information for each item of equipment:
a. Catalog Sheets.
b. Assembly details or dimension drawings.
c. Installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number.
e. Name of local supplier.
2. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data.
3. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets)
B. Quality Assurance / Control:
1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are
specified.
2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or
EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is
available.
B. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances
applicable to this Division.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 2
1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation
and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this
instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain informa-
tion listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project.
1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items:
a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings.
b. Letter of 1-year guarantee of workmanship.
c. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings.
d. Copy of letter verifying owner’s receipt of spare parts.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Con-
tractor:
“The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to re-place or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, any part of this installation which
may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance.”
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon
which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked-up prints shall be turned
over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work
shall be included without additional cost to Owner.
B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with
site dimensions and with other Sections.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 3
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual
locations for proper installation.
2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be
served before installation or rough-in.
a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work.
b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with
mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and
functional.
3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching,
trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable
Sections.
B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations
through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify
Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance
is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full-load nameplates current rating
and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 - 1
SECTION 26 0502
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To
1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 26051 – Common Electrical Requirements
2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All
such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or
dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in
completed work.
B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways,
conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods
and materials as specified for new construction.
C. Carefully remove all existing ceiling devices and light fixtures located on identified ceilings to
be replaced. clean, store and reinstall on and/or in new ceilings and reconnect. EC shall
recertify existing fire alarm system to the satisfaction of the local AHJ.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Perform drilling, cutting, block-offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary
portions of electrical system. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without
prior written permission from Architect.
B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove
circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re-used back to next active fixture,
device, or junction box.
C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is
specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site
and dispose of legally.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 1
SECTION 26 0519
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
PART 1 -
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Line Voltage Conductors:
1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown:
a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise.
b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger.
2. Insulation:
a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C).
b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C).
c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes.
3. Colors:
a. 208Y / 120 V System:
1) Black: Phase A.
2) Red: Phase B.
3) Blue: Phase C.
4) Green: Ground.
5) White: Neutral.
b. 480Y / 277 Volt System:
1) Brown: Phase A.
2) Orange: Phase B.
3) Yellow: Phase C.
4) Gray: Neutral.
5) Green: Ground.
c. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods
for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed.
d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or
taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above.
B. Standard Connectors:
1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors.
2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 2
3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non-
hardening sealant.
C. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors:
1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com
b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.
2. Do not use direct burial cable.
B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts):
1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of
different voltage systems in separate conduits.
2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules.
Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings.
3. Neutrals:
a. On three-phase, 4-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits.
b. On single-phase, 3-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits.
c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings.
d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors
to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will
carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase
conductors unless specifically noted otherwise.
4. Pulling Conductors:
a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet
boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture.
b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors.
c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except
as excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation.
C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps
listed for such use.
D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices:
1. Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Burndy
b. Thomas & Betts.
c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and
placing concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding
conductor installation.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2
B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal
without splice. Provide grounding for following.
1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures.
2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures.
3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system.
4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards.
5. Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller
cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures.
C. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6
inches of point of entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and
valves to assure electrical continuity.
D. Provide concrete-encased electrode system by embedding 20 feet minimum of No. 2/0 bare copper
conductor in concrete footing, 2 inches minimum below concrete surface. Extend No. 2/0 copper
conductor to main panel as shown on Drawings.
E. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer
supplying building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side
of main service disconnect.
F. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in
length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment.
G. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment
enclosures.
H. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor.
I. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground.
1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG.
2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings.
J. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use
intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet.
K. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal
frame with bolted solderless lug.
L. Do not bond neutral conductor of emergency generator set to set frame at generator location.
M. Ground cabinet of transformers to conduit and ground wires, if installed. Bond transformer secondary
neutral conductor to cabinet.
N. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest ground per NEC and local inspector.
O. Provide and install a #6 ground conductor from main service ground to telephone board. Terminate
ground at board on a grounding bar.
P. Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits.
Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit
ground is not acceptable. Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to
ground system.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding
conductor.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project
but furnished under other Divisions.
2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed
under other Divisions.
3. Furnish and install air / vapor barrier back boxes as described in Contract Documents.
4. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to
comply with telephone company requirements.
5. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company
requirements.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Raceway And Conduit:
1. Sizes:
a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use.
b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product.
a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all
areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and
galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape.
b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is:
a) Not subject to damage.
b) Not in contact with earth.
c) Not in concrete.
2) Flexible steel conduit or metal-clad cable required for final connections to indoor
mechanical equipment.
c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit:
1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC
elbows and risers.
d. Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36
inches.
e. Pre-wired 3/8 Inch Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting
fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 2
3. Prohibited Raceway Materials:
a. Aluminum conduit.
b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable.
B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use.
2. EMT:
a. Compression type.
b. Steel set screw housing type.
3. PVC Conduit:
a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes.
b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer.
4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type.
5. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type.
6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper.
7. Prohibited Fitting Materials:
a. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings.
b. Cast set-screw fittings for EMT.
c. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement.
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes
are used, provide following:
a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box.
b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required.
c. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to
bring box flush with finish surface.
2. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be 4 11/16” square deep box with single gang mud ring.
D. Air / Vapor Barrier Back Boxes: Pre-molded polyethylene fitting between framing members and
inhibiting air / vapor infiltration and exfiltration around recessed outlet boxes.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contact Information:
1. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com.
2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com.
3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com.
7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with
site dimensions and with other Sections.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 3
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC
equipment.
2. Before rough-in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly
located for purpose intended.
a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22.
b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough-in.
Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction.
3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for
box doors.
4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be
installed under other Divisions.
B. Conduit And Raceway:
1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be
exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel
suspension ceiling systems. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building
structure lines.
2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes.
3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and
outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting.
a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not
effectively reduced.
b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC.
4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends
during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have
accumulated.
5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all
raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross
building expansion joints.
6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable
accessible area and cap for future use.
7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof
penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all
roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor.
8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty
conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of
each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings.
9. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural
isolation break (SIB) joints.
10. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL-listed
foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic
nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls.
11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding
plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush.
12. Installation In Framing:
a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches
of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of
member width.
b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum.
13. Underground Raceway And Conduit:
a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 4
b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to
install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches
deep at point of exit from planting areas.
14. Conduit And Raceway Support:
a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required.
b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval.
Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by:
1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry.
2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units.
3) Wood screws on wood.
4) Metal screws on metal.
15. Prohibited Procedures:
a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports,
boxes, cabinets, or other equipment.
b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed.
c. Use of torches for bending PVC.
d. Spray applied PVC cement.
e. Boring holes in truss members.
f. Notching of structural members.
g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires.
h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway.
C. Boxes:
1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover.
2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In
other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back.
3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets.
4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb.
5. Support switch boxes larger than two-gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed
walls.
6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future
use.
7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier.
8. Location:
a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on
Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and
report discrepancies to Architect before rough-in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb shall
be within 6 inches of door jamb.
b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and
structural features.
c. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and
consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly
and in straight lines with each other, if possible.
d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1
SECTION 26 0553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related
Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this Section
and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters
on a black background.
B. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types
not approved.
C. Conductor-color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard
doors.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on the
inside of the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside of each
coverplate. Use a permanent black marker.
3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2
A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule.
System Voltage
Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V
Phase A Brown Black
Phase B Orange Red
Phase C Yellow Blue
Neutral White with White
orange stripe
Grounding Green Green
Isolated Ground Green with Green with
yellow stripe yellow stripe
Switchleg (lighting) Purple Pink
3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below.
B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment
designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source.
C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor
Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify source to device and the load it serves, including location.
D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load
served and source.
E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and
secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 1
SECTION 26 2816
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Enclosures.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related
Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for disconnect switches.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 26 0526 - Grounding.
B. In the event of conflict regarding individually enclosed low-voltage protective device
requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section
shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following (for each type of switch);
1. Square D Company
2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES
A. General: Provide heavy duty type disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein.
Provide:
1. Heavy duty switches on 240 and/0r 600 volt rated circuits.
2. HP rated switches on all motor circuits.
2.03 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES
A. Provide heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated
of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 and/or 600 volts, 60 hertz;
incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed
that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Provide single phase or three
phase with solid neutral as required by applications. Equip with an interlocked operating
handle which is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
as required by application, unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection
fuse clip kits.
2.04 FUSES
A. Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill
electrical requirements for services indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare
fuse for each 10 installed but not less than three of any one type and size.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 2
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install disconnects plumb.
C. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF (Above Finished Floor).
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness of connections for
disconnects.
END OF SECTION
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 1
SECTION 26 2913
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B. Types of motor starter in this section include the following:
1. AC Fraction horsepower Manual Starters
2. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters
3. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters
4. AC Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related
Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for motor controls.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. In the event of conflict regarding motor starters requirements between this Section and any
other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each
type and rating of motor starter):
1. Allen-Bradley Company
2. General Electric Company
3. Square D Company
2.02 MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES
A. For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10
installed units, but not more than 5 units of each type, for both power and control circuit
fuses.
2.03 MOTOR STARTERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components; of
types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated which comply with
manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published
information, and as required for complete installations.
B. Thermal Overload Units: Provide thermal overload units, sized in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations for full load current of motor controlled. Provide thermal
heater units, sized to actual running full load current if actual full load current is less than 90
percent of motor nameplate full load current. Size heater for mechanical equipment after air
and water balancing have been completed. Spare parts: Provide a spare set of each type
and/or size.
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 2
C. AC Fractional HP Manual Starters (Equal to Square D Class 2510): Provide manual, single-
phase, 1 and 2 pole, 300 volt AC max, fractional HP motor starters, of types, ratings and
electrical characteristics indicated; equip with one piece thermal overload relay with field
adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent of nominal overload heater rating; for
protection of AC motors of 1 HP and less. (For manually controlled motors in excess of 1
HP, see Line Voltage Manual Starters specified herein.) Provide starter with quick-make,
quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with lock-off toggle operated
handle. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless noted otherwise. Provide flush
mounted units with coverplate to match wiring device coverplates.
D. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters (Equal to Square D Class 2510): Provide line voltage
manual starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600
volt AC max; equip with pushbutton operator, low voltage protection feature, and green pilot
light. Provide starters with trip free mechanism such that contacts will open under load and
remain open until thermal element has cooled, and unit is reset. Mount surface units in
NEMA 1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Provide overlapping trim for flush mounted
units.
E. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8536): Provide line voltage
magnetic starters (nothing smaller than size 1 - typical all arrangements), to types, ratings
and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt max, 120 bolt control voltage
with thermal overload protection and under voltage trip in all phases. Equip units with
holding contact, 2 normally open, and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, unless noted
otherwise. Provide fused control transformer in each starter. Mount hand-off-auto switch,
red pilot light and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted
otherwise. Equip all spare starters complete with items as specified herein.
F. AC Combination Non-Reversing Breaker and Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class
8538): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings and electrical
characteristics as indicated for 8536; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volts max with non-reversing
magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with motor circuit
protector.
1. Provide instantaneous trip circuit breaker as indicated and adjust to comply with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide combination starters for individual
mounting, or for group mounting in motor control center as indicated. Provide NEMA
1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
G. AC Combination Non-Reversing Fused Disconnect and Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square
D Class 8539): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings, and electrical
characteristics; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum with non-reversing magnetic starters as
specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with fusible disconnect switch. Provide
quick-make, quick-break, visible blade disconnect switch. Provide 2, 3, and 4; and visible
blade, automatic circuit interrupters with push-to-trip feature and separate fuse clips for
larger NEMA sizes. Fuse all starters with dual-element (time-delay) fuses equal to Bussman
FRN/FRS. Provide combination starters for individualmounting, or for group mounting in
motor control centers as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS
A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA’s “Standards of Installation”,
2022 HINCKLEY BUILDING FAN COIL REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
REXBURG IDAHO
MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 3
and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any.
C. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for
free mechanical movement.
D. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
E. Each motor starter shall be equipped with lock out capabilities.
F. Subsequent to wire/care hook-up energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of
equipment in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION